JP2011010849A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can prevent excitement and enjoyment of a game from decreasing.SOLUTION: The game machine has a start pocket which allows the receiving of game balls shot into a playfield. When the game balls win the playfield, a lottery processing for the jackpot is conducted at a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game which awards players a special favor is carried out. In this game machine, a suspension performance is conducted to suggest the degree of expectation for the lottery processing at a stage before the lottery processing for the jackpot is carried out.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, a gaming machine is known in which a determination process for winning a jackpot is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the start port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, the jackpot is determined with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which a large number of game balls are paid out to the player is performed. Note that one predetermined winning probability may be set to a higher probability by a probability variation function under a predetermined condition.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the literature 1, when a determination process for winning a jackpot is performed, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Next, an expected effect is made as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this way are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that suggests that the jackpot has been won. As a result, the player can enjoy the above expected production about whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination, and enjoy the result, and finally determine the result of the determination process from the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed. You will be able to recognize and play.

  In addition, in this type of gaming machine including the gaming machine described in the same document 1, every time a game ball enters the start opening, a determination process for winning a jackpot (winning determination process) is set to a predetermined upper limit. In many cases, the state is put on hold until a certain number of times, so that the execution of these determination processes is temporarily waited. That is, every time a predetermined start condition is established, the winning determination process thus put on hold is sequentially digested so that the winning determination process is continuously performed without interruption. Realization of gameability (holding game) in which the game progresses smoothly is achieved.

JP 2008-012352 A

  However, in a gaming machine that realizes the above-mentioned reserved game, even if a game ball is inserted into the start opening, the winning determination process corresponding to the entrance is performed when a predetermined start condition is established. It is not executed until it is in order. For this reason, when trying to display a hold indicating the status of such a pending game, when the number of holds is large, only the situation that the winning judgment process is not easily digested will be emphasized, and the gaming interest will be reversed. It may be reduced.

  Furthermore, after a transition to an advantageous gaming state in which setting is changed to a higher probability by the probability variation function, it is an important concern for the player whether or not this gaming state is continued. However, the advantageous game state continuation rate is determined by the predetermined distribution rate of the winning type. For this reason, the player can only have a certain expectation according to the distribution ratio, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest will be lowered by such monotonous game characteristics.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing novel game play by a hold display particularly when the number of holds is large.

  In order to achieve such an object, in the invention described in claim 1, based on a random number acquisition unit that acquires a random number based on a game ball entering the start port, and a random number acquired by the random number acquisition unit, A jackpot determining means for performing a determination process for the jackpot, a special game executing means for performing a special game in which a privilege is given to a player based on the result of the determination process by the jackpot determining means, and the jackpot When the jackpot is won in the determination process by the determination means, the special game is executed by the special game execution means based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, and then the low probability that is less advantageous for the player. Neither the gaming state nor the high probability gaming state in which the advantage for the player is increased by making it easier to win the jackpot than the low probability gaming state. When a random number is acquired by the state control means that can generate the random number and the random number acquisition means, the determination process by the jackpot determination means corresponding to the acquired random number is made to wait until its execution condition is satisfied and suspended. A hold display corresponding to each of the determination processing that is in the hold state is a predetermined display so that the player can recognize the hold status for the determination processing by the game hold means and the game hold means. The determination based on the hold display control means for performing display control related to the hold display in a form appearing in the section, and the random number provided to the determination process by the jackpot determination means while being put on hold An anticipation precedence determination means for predetermining whether the expectation for winning the jackpot when the processing is performed is a high expectation or a low expectation; The hold display control means, when performing the hold display, that the degree of expectation is high in the preceding determination by the expectation degree preceding determination means based on the winning determination random number among the random numbers used in the determination process displayed on hold In addition to determining whether the degree of expectation is high, the degree of expectation prior suggestion means capable of executing display control in a form in which a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display In the case of performing the hold display, when the jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery in the determination process to be displayed on hold, any of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state after the special game corresponding thereto Is determined based on the winning type determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and the low probability gaming state is generated Specific state prior suggestion means capable of executing display control that makes it easy for the display mode for each hold display to be different between when it is determined that the highly probable gaming state occurs, and When controlled in the low-probability gaming state, the display control by the expectation prior suggestion means can be executed so that the expectation when the determination process is put on hold is easily maintained. On the other hand, when being controlled to the highly probable gaming state, by making display control by the specific state prior suggestion means executable, in any of the determination processes in the holding state The gist is that the determination process in the on-hold state is sequentially digested while making the player aware of whether the high-probability gaming state is finished and is likely to be controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Do

  In the above configuration, when the low-probability gaming state with low advantage for the player is controlled, the pending display of the determination process in which the expectation is determined to be high in the advance determination by the expectation advance determination means is usually It is possible to execute display control in such a way that a specific display mode different from the above display mode appears. As a result, even if there is a situation where the jackpot is difficult to win (low-probability gaming state), when many determination processes are put on hold, the determination process determined that the degree of expectation is high through such display control. An effect suggested to be in a hold state (an advantageous hold effect) is likely to appear. In this case, the expectation in the low-probability gaming state can be sustained over a plurality of symbol variations. become.

  On the other hand, in the highly probable gaming state where the advantage for the player is increased by making it easier to win the jackpot, if the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the judgment process displayed on hold, It is possible to execute display control in which the display mode for the hold display is easily different between the case where the low-probability gaming state occurs after the special game corresponding to the game and the case where the high-probability gaming state occurs.

  According to such control, even if the high-probability gaming state is simply maintained without winning a jackpot, for example, a hold display with a high probability of generating a low-probability gaming state is 1 As long as the player is in one of the displayed states, the player functions as a demoted game mode in which the player is actively aware of the risk of demoting to a low-probability gaming state over multiple symbol variations. On the other hand, for example, as long as no hold display with a high probability of generating a low-probability gaming state is displayed, but only a hold display with a high probability of generating a high-probability gaming state is displayed, The player functions as a continuous game mode in which the player is positively aware that the highly probable gaming state is likely to be continued over a plurality of symbol variations. That is, in this case, in the high-probability gaming state, the game mode transition between a plurality of on-hold gaming modes having different continuation rates is performed for the player even though the continuation rate of the gaming state is constant. It is possible to give an impression as if the production is being performed, and by this, the probability of winning the jackpot is set high, so that it is suitable for gaming entertainment in a highly accurate gaming state where it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension Can be maintained.

  The “random number acquired based on the game ball entering the start port” is, for example, the random number acquired when the game ball enters the start port, It may be a random number obtained after entering a ball that is acquired at any timing within the winning start game that is started on the condition that a game ball is entered. In other words, it means “a random number that can be acquired on condition that a game ball has entered the starting port”.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide novel game play by holding display particularly when the number of holdings is large.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. They are the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hitting ball | bowl launcher and the launch rail in the state which is not operating the operation handle part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of back view of the pachinko machine which shows the wiring etc. of a payout control board and a substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, and is the perspective view seen from the back surface of the state which open | released the cover body. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is the pachinko machine which attached the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, Comprising: It is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the state where a cover body concerning a second embodiment was removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps and contacts the lower part of the cover object concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is a front view of the game board shown with the back unit seen on the back side of a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front with the back unit visible on the back side of a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is BB sectional drawing in FIG. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen afterwards. It is a front view of a game board which shows the state where the lower movable ornament, the upper left movable ornament, and the upper right movable ornament were retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a center frame movable decoration body. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the notch part of the center frame movable decorative body vicinity in a center role. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st and 2nd start opening prize process. It is a front view of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when a step-up notice effect is performed. It is a front view of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when a step-up notice effect is performed. It is a front view of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when the continuous appearance effect of a 1st character is performed. It is a front view of the periphery of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when the effect using a lower movable ornament is performed. It is a front view of the periphery of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when the effect using a lower movable ornament is performed. It is a front view of the periphery of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when a background change effect is performed. It is a front view of the periphery of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when a background change effect is performed. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the hold | maintenance of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a hold | maintenance display area. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 2nd special symbol is accumulate | stored in a holding | maintenance display area. (A) is another figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 1st special symbol is accumulate | stored in a holding | maintenance display area. (B) is another figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 2nd special symbol is accumulate | stored in a holding | maintenance display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in which the starting memory of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol is digested in a holding | maintenance display area. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related effect in a normal game state. (A) It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related production | presentation which continues from FIG. 183, and is a figure which confirms that the result of special production | presentation determination was hit. (B) It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related production | presentation which continues from FIG. 183, and is a figure which confirms that the result of special production | presentation determination was losing. It is a figure which shows another aspect of the hold | maintained production | presentation in a normal game state. (A) It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related production | presentation which continues from FIG. 185, and is a figure which confirms that the result of special production | presentation determination was hit. (B) It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related production | presentation which continues from 185, and is a figure which confirms that the result of special production | presentation determination was losing. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the promotion aspect in a normal game state, and a hold related effect. FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating one mode of a hold-related effect in the promotion mode continued from FIG. 187. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the reservation related effect in a special game state. It is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the reservation related effect in a time-short game state. (A) It is a figure which shows the mode of the holding | maintenance in the normal game state in which a time-shortening function does not operate | move. (B) It is a figure which shows the mode of the holding | maintenance in the special game state in which a time-shortening function operates.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and below the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards for controlling electrical components, a power board 1136, and the like are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is provided. It is detachable. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along a line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along a line DD. , EE sectional drawing (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to this embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Are assembled in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame 12 by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members thereof, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support projecting piece 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined to the support flange 47 When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. is doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 504 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 47, The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, speakers 121 and 391). Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker lighting unit 120 includes a vertically long lighting unit 122 and a sound unit 130 having a side speaker 121 arranged above and below the lighting unit 122 in the left and right units, respectively. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker ornament 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker ornament 131 from the rear side. Shaped speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131, holding the speaker cover and having a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which a rearward projecting portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flying guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in accordance with the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base main body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose front surface is open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface thereof. In addition, a pair of mounting holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c located substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. It is formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, and on the rear surface wall, two guide projections 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction, and disposed below the right side guide projection 182a in rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a in the form of horizontally elongated holes for guiding the movement of the slide body 182; an insertion horizontal hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted; and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is accommodated in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the covering, the screw 182 is screwed into the mounting hole 110f via the mounting hole 184d, so that the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing (A) from the back. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, and 296, and LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, etc., for relaying and supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, LEDs in the central rotating lamp unit 280, motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. This is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface has a shape substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221i that protrudes rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side while the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery thereof. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of this embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and that is open on the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). In addition, the reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed) Between the cylindrical part 221a and the inclined part 221b, a lens opening part 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. Also, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting bosses 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixing boss 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to a substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a projecting piece 222e projecting in a plate shape from the rear side to the rear side of the diffusion lens part 222d and a lens sheet 223 sandwiched between the upper and lower projecting pieces and on the rear side of the curved lens part 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative board 226 is an ultra-bright LED and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens holder 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. Base 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a bottom surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 243, the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 243 is covered with the rotating portion base 242. The rotating part holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and the rotating lamp base gear 243 is coaxially fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 247 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating holder 247 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 and on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 as shown in the drawing. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening portion 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, and has a box shape with the upper part opened, and an opening on a side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp base gear 263 are mounted in parallel with the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided. The attachment step portion 261b rotates from above. The part base 262 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 262b of the rotating part base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 262 and the rotation unit holder 267.

  Further, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the drawing, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base part 273a, an opening part 273b drilled in the center of the base part 273a, and a base part 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 has an insertion hole 272a into which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, whereby the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the top opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 which is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 287 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the central rotating position detecting substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 282b of the rotating part base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the top opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the plate unit with the plate back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the plate unit after the plate back plate and the lending unit are removed. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-shaped dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310. 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates on the tray body 310, an operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the tray body 310 and that can be operated by the player depending on the game state (game situation), and a tray unit body 320 below the dish body 310. dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be disposed and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front, a lower left decorative board 190 for emitting and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been put in after deducting the remainder of the loaned portion is returned when the return button 301b is pressed. Yes.

  In addition, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game content (game effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is arranged on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 and is lowered to the right side and the front side in a plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b which is continuous with the rear portion of the first portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface which is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with the front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and the front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; And a fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between a partition wall 311f where a rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage tray 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a line in the left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. A stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the game balls that are distributed, and the static electricity charged on the game balls is charged. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end thereof is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing down by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish body 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction is arranged. A flange portion 316 b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 at the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e that is disposed above the handle base mounting port 321d and faces a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-like right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is smaller than the right decoration base 324 and disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324, and the main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and cut off at the four corners corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326 and having a metallic luster plating surface that is smaller than the left cover 326, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that decorates the peripheral edges of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-shaped than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired, and the through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decoration base 323 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330, and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right ornament 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to a metallic luster plating process.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction. An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a that is disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decorating board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the spherical inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is set back by a predetermined amount with respect to the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be circulated. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a ball flow path opening 345 that penetrates in a substantially L shape corresponding to a ball discharge path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390, which will be described later, and a ball flow in the upper left of the ball discharge path opening 345 when viewed from the front. A latch opening 346 that is disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrates in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of the second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is arranged in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape and the ball rental unit 301 that is arranged on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inlet 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in the direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355 in the direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage tray 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position where the second ball outlet 312 is closed and an open position where the second ball outlet 312 is opened A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIG. 44 and FIG. 47) that rotatably supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end portion.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar portion that extends from the closing portion 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. The second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can pivot about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removal spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball removal shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the plate 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 that is pivotally supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shallow dish shape so that it can show in figure, and the accommodation space which accommodates the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 with the plate body 310 can be formed now. Yes. The height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball and lower, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates and the second ball removal port 312 is rotated. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball outlet 312 can be held in the opened (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the up-down direction to guide the main button 371 in the up-down direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and a sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above and formed on the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall portion 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having an open lower surface by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button receiving recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a has a thick thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and also by the outer peripheral wall of these cylindrical light guide openings 373d. The main button housing recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the main button 371 has an upper end that contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a and a lower end that contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be diffused widely, and the entire surface of the main button 370 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371, whereas the main button base 371b is a cone whose lower end is narrowed downward from a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inner side of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. When the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373 The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, A box-shaped speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position on the right side of the front surface in the front view and at a position on the rear side of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 is mainly provided. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to vibration of the lower speaker 391 It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball extraction path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 that holds the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left side in a front view. And a second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotating shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotating operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotating motion of the rotating shaft 415 to a sliding motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. 303a is inserted and fixed. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. In this way, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410, and the rotation operation is easy without being uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 always keeps the rotation operation member 414 from the original position. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that conductive plating is applied to the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  In addition, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and a cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engagement recess 182 c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the stored state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanting cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  In addition, the wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c is supported on the shaft support side along the lower back side of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. Thus, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that flow into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 follow the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper part of the fifth inclined surface 311e (the right end portion in plan view) while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e Around the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f so as to go around the fifth inclined surface 311e and return to the fourth inclined surface 311d side disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 disposed between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to dispose the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. Containers (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game ball can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 62B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped even though the hitting operation is stopped, and the game may not be continued. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311a are almost gone, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b downstream from the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second ball outlet 312 is intended to flow in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e after being reflected by the outer peripheral wall 311h. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inflow port 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Therefore, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball connection rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced to cause clogging of the balls. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341 is such that the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage tray 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. It is possible to prevent the lowering of the game balls flowing in from the upper side, and the lower game balls (especially, the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340) are promoted to move in the horizontal direction. Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of this example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game balls in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 in the front-rear direction substantially center, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery on the upper side with respect to the vertical center Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decoration board and is supported by the terminal board support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decoration board 453 is fixed to the glass decoration relay terminal board 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In this glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and back of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LEDs 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately. A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the inner rail 603, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601. The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the projection piece 472 before the crime prevention and the unit frame 451 The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path portion from hitting the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800 (corresponding to a payout unit of the present invention), a full unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and a game board 4, a board unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except 4, a power supply board 1136, and the like are provided together, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. And a main body frame main body 500 on which various components such as these are mounted.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side and the front open side that surround the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5. An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by protrusions protruding in parallel to the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and the inner side of the right front opening side side as viewed from the front side. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end, and the left side pivot support side portion on the left side when viewed from the front is the front upper side portion or the front side opening. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front side pivot support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side portion of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the back side of the open part of the door frame 5. A bent open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 154 are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  The above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the most fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where cheating is likely to be performed. Of course, although the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also functions sufficiently, in many cases, the support side is strong. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the distance between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is higher than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a locking device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to pass through and opened forward, is opened. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base 4. As shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. In addition, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end portion of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that protrudes in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 for accommodating a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is provided at a position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hitting basket 687 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle-passing opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  The outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side) is formed in a step shape (see FIG. 75) that inclines inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Further, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that is in contact with the rear side wall and extends rearward from the first side wall 540 substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and accommodates a rearward protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, the open side rear wall 544 is formed on the left side (open side), the top side and the right side (shaft support side) of the fourth side wall 543 from the rear end side when viewed from the back side. An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800, which constitute a ball payout mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to be a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 described later of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side. A lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. Note that not only the upper and middle portions of the lock device 1000 are attached by screws, but also a screw attachment portion 1003 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008 described later and a lock attachment hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking protrusions 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a clearance hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivot support side rear wall 546 on the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, a prize ball guiding projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the shaft support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. In addition, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-like engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with a button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and a rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear side of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, the locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As described above, the configuration of the main body frame main body 500 including the game board installation recess 510 and the plate portion 511 has been described. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project. However, the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state which closed the door frame 5, the area | region from the approximate center part of the board part 511 in which the launcher attachment part 520 and the launch rail 515 are arrange | positioned to an open side is the back surface of the door frame 5, and the launcher attachment part. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 585 as described above is It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side has no portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, and thus the door frame 5 is closed In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 that intrude into are formed. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder in an assembled state, cut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 83 is a front component that mainly constitutes the game board. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel, the panel holder, and the like, exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed from diagonally backward. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the main control board box fixed to the board holder for obliquely from behind. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 through the panel holder 630. The front component 601 is attached to the front so as to surround the game area 605, and the function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) is fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after these gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end thereof, and is formed in an oblique shape, and the foul mouth is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Furthermore, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projecting piece 475 protruding from the security cover 470 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  In addition, an out port 606 is provided at the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guiding passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protruding piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the open side gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when it is pushed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed on the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch of the launch rail 515. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  In addition, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp affixing portion 615 of the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various game devices (for example, general winning ports 2004, 2101, starting ports 2001, 2002, grand winning ports 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 are located downstream. A liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be guided in alignment with A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is stored is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction relatively larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of the board holder 623. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball in the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630. It mainly includes a front component member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin. . The gaming panel 600 is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a that are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 600c has a shape in which approximately half of the board thickness of the game panel 600 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  The game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, and the like (see FIGS. 159 and 160). In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. Note that these openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 is connected, so the strength of the gaming panel 600 is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape. The panel holder 630 has a thickness of a member made of wooden plywood in a game board of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game board base). It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 630 a has a front inner peripheral surface that is sized so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are arranged on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 to be inserted is formed, the panel 600 extends along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member that is fixedly mounted using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole is appropriately sized according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 630j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is configured to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l, so that the attachment holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 has a positioning unit 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 630, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f of the panel holder 630.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this manner, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the present example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engagement step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 600 in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting apparatus, and to install the obstacle nail planting apparatus. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes, etc. are determined depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as a common part. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be recycled and the gaming panel 600 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be adapted to various types of machines by simply exchanging only.

  Furthermore, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the rear unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, a transparent game panel 600 that forms the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630. However, in the same manner as a conventional pachinko machine, 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of wooden plywood such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. As shown in the drawing, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and the bottom is the front side at the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be received and discharged downward from a substantially center in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (right side in rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and graphics, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and graphics as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 to be described later When a game ball wins in the mouth 2001, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins in the second start port 2002, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. It has become.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won in the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange colors. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through a gate 2201 of a gate member 2200 described later, a predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol fluctuation display is being executed by the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened and closed, the gate is opened. The game symbol that is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2201) is lit with the normal symbol memory display 646 on the basis of the number of game balls passed as the number of reserves. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the lighting color as the gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status display 647, and a round display 648 are allocated to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, respectively, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648, the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). A segment display opening 601c is formed in the front component 601 at a position corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, and the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing part 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol variation display by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby displaying the variation display of the special symbol by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2005 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second start port 2002. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so as to be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, at the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648, as shown in FIG. 88, the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b. Is printed with a value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming status indicator 647 notifies the fact that the gaming status is a probability change by displaying the color to be lit as the gaming status, and the two-round display lamp 648a is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is in the opened status from the closed status. The 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the number of rounds is two. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the game status display 647 and the round display 648, respectively.

  In this way, the function display sticker 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed on the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thus, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) when the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state are 2 times and 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents to be printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a front perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA cross-sectional view (D) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the firing base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at a substantially center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 that is fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an opening 657 for an operating piece is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In the working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 that comes into contact with the mounting piece 660 is provided on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659 so as to be swingable. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the ball striking rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner is provided behind the slide member storage space 656 to slide the slide rod 677. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 is a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back side thereof, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front side. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and a motor mounting boss 661 that expands forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 which are integrally formed and are housed in the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the striking ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing the function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left inner wall is Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. 93, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right direction in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball striking device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle 410 of the handle device 400 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanted cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the holding position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. In addition, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodate the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced by the degree of sphere polymerization, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in a clogged sphere. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the related art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail engaging grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. A hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked from above into the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape with the upper surface open, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. Therefore, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is an easy-to-understand illustration of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841, and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front and rear bent passage portion 772a. The left and right bent passage portions 772b are bent in the direction (left and right as viewed from the back), and the vertical passage portions 772c communicate with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and have a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When the portion 772c no longer has a ball due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the ball that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . The vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 that covers the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, a prize ball in-unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 825; And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball path (bending path 803, prize ball path 810, ball extraction path 811) and is formed within the depth width dimension of the ball path. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere that remains in the passage 803, and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is housed inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 to be described later, and is finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is attached to the pivot side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided with a bar-like detachable button 822 provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the front end of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 is not possible.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is protruded long toward the rear side, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. is doing.

  The structure of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed at the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with the front side of a substantially square shape open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the board cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove part 828 of the relay board area 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw part 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. When the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 protrudes from the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825 through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted at one end to the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866, and a shaft that is drilled in the aluminum heat sink 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided on the unit sub-plate 825 above the second gear 844. A shaft 848 press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 to be formed is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with the rotation shaft 808 as a center. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection cutouts 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked up and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front part of the main body frame 3 from the lower relief motor relief opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side from the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573 and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed downward while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released, the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. Then, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are disengaged from each other by moving to the front side, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. For this reason, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed from a prize ball entrance 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 immediately below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivotal protrusion 911 when viewed from the front side on the downstream side of the rear surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 to be described next when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted to and supported by the shaft projection 911. It has become.

  Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of a switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent so that the upstream foul bulb inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul balls taken into the foul mouth 610 are guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  Also, the box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that engage with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that collides with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication bar 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of normal prize balls is about to be paid out, the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving type full switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after paying out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the sphere flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case in which a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogged balls. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball with a reduced momentum in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. FIG. 123 is a perspective view (B) and (C) of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the lock device 1000 has a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are prevented from being illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, rectangular hook penetration openings 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass are opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001, and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed to project from the upper end and middle of (see FIG. 123) and the lower ends of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, the rivet slots 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively formed at the three upper and lower rivet holes 1050 are formed. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet slots 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower ends of the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment board 1011. The lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions on one side of the vertical side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040. A guide protrusion 1043 protrudes below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the raising operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The connection hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connection wire rod 1053. Further, the abutting portion 1067 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth without any backlash. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the locking device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced to close the projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engagement protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 1040 against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 also starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the illustrated clockwise direction, and moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not closely contacting the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b closely contacting the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The board unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIG. 68 and FIG. 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIG. 126 and FIG. Various substrates such as a door relay board 1102, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to a resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the auxiliary drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 for storing the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 in the present embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129 in order to dissipate heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, malfunction of the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the substrate box located on the lower side and the substrate box located on the upper side.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. The insertion opening 1115a is inserted into the insertion protrusion 1134 that protrudes above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are drawn to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in rows. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed which is spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected. The junction guide hole 1126 and the guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, and the ground A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ground connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic ground wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 4150 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and an area with the high step is an attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the payout control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one ground connector 1140 of the plurality of ground connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 3, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, the caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the case of illustration, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4), for example, by inspection or the like. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  The dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  Note that resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by being covered with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed as rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, and 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. For this reason, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting region 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fastening with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than control board 4100 and liquid crystal control board 4150, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, housed in dispensing control board box 1105 The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. As described above, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wire from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wire from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 from above at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In addition, what is necessary is just to cancel | release engagement with the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engaging groove 785, when releasing.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a state where the cover body according to the second embodiment is removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that comes into contact with the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described retaining hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144); The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the notches 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140), and the payout control board box 1105 Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, the game board 4 is not shown.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly closer to the upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder 575 to insert the cover body 1300 into the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by being pivotally supported by the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engaging piece 1302 is locked in the cover body engaging groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutment projection 1305 that abut against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 protrudes relatively low from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303 along the one side opening edge. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the locking piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked while the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower side on the back side, and the shape is very refreshing. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, the overall thickness is uniform. Since it is easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. This point also has the same effect as shown in FIG. 3 in the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As a second reason, as described above, since the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105, the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be particularly opened. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. However, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even in the state where the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300. Therefore, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection control opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Further, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up backwards, It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 165. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board shown with the back unit visible on the back side of the game panel, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the game board with the back unit seen on the back side of the game panel viewed from the left front side. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 156 is an AA sectional view in FIG. 153, FIG. 157 is a BB sectional view in FIG. 153, and FIG. 158 is a CC sectional view in FIG. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal rear. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the back unit, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after disassembling the back unit. is there.

  FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower movable ornament, the upper left movable ornament, and the upper right movable ornament are retracted from the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 164 is a center frame movable ornament. FIG. 165 is an enlarged perspective view showing a notch portion in the vicinity of the center frame movable decorative body in the center accessory.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control ball 410 as a game medium (simply “ A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a transparent plate-like game that is disposed so as to close the game area 605 behind the front component member 601 A panel 600, a frame-like panel holder 630 that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 and holds the gaming panel 600 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 601, and an out port outside the gaming area 605 A function display unit 640 disposed below the front structural member 601 on the right side of 606, and a function display seal 64 attached to the front surface of the function display unit 640 And an attacker unit 2000 that is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area 605 and above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000. A side prize opening member 2100 supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, a gate member 2200 disposed slightly on the left side from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and the game area 605 A frame-shaped center accessory 2300 which is arranged at a substantially central portion and is supported by the game panel 600, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the panel holder 630, a transparent game panel 600 and a center on the rear side of the back unit 3000 It is attached so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2300 and displays a predetermined effect image. A liquid crystal display device 1400 of the effect display means capable, the mainly provided.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction of the transparent game panel 600, and then the game panel 600 It is fixed to the front. This attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2000 is arranged at substantially the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2001, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001, and the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002. It has a section-shaped large winning opening 2003 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2004 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2003.

  The first start port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2002 arranged below the first start port 2001 is a pair of movable pieces 2005 that can be expanded by the start port solenoid 2015 (see FIG. 166) between the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002. When the pair of movable pieces 2005 rises substantially vertically, the first start port 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005 make it impossible for the game ball to be received into the second start port 2002. Thus, in a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 151), the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are configured to be opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2015 based on detection of the passage of a game ball by a gate sensor 2202 of a gate member 2200 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2003 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and lottery is performed when a game ball is received (starts winning) in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002. According to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit”), the actuator solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 166) is driven to open and close.

  Furthermore, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened obliquely to the upper left so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

[2-2. Side prize opening member]
Further, the side prize opening member 2100 in the game board 4 is an opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the transparent game panel 600. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600, and is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2004 on the left side when viewed from the front in the attacker unit 2000. Two general winning ports 2101 are provided. As shown in the drawing, these two general winning ports 2101 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2100 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2100, and the shelf is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. 2102, and the shelf 2102 can draw the game balls flowing down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605. Note that the two general winning openings 2101 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the shelf 2102, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center of the game area 605 by the shelf 2102, the general winning openings 2102 are arranged. There is a possibility to win a prize.

[2-3. Gate member]
Further, the gate member 2200 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the transparent game panel 600 on the left side of the transparent panel 600 and slightly above the center of the vertical direction. Thus, the game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball passed through the gate 2201 can be detected by a gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201. It is like that.

[2-4. Center character]
In addition, the center accessory 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600, and is then placed on the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is between the outer diameter of the game area 605 and the outer diameter of the game ball. Are formed in an arc shape so that a slightly larger gap is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605. Has been. A gate member 2200 is disposed between the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  The center accessory 2300 includes a flange portion 2300a formed in a thin frame shape that contacts the front surface of the game panel 600, and an insertion wall portion that extends from the flange portion 2300a into the opening portion 600e of the game panel 600. 2300b and a front wall portion 2300c protruding forward from the flange portion 2300a. On the front wall portion 2300c of the center accessory 2300, an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left direction is formed on the left side from a position slightly on the right side in the left-right direction center on the upper outer peripheral surface, When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and also flows (enters) to the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls flow down to the lower part of the game area 605 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. That is, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a random game.

  The center accessory 2300 releases the warp entrance 2302 into which the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall 2300b, and the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2302 into the frame. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the insertion wall portion 2300b by rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2303 in the horizontal direction and then releasing it into the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 200. And mainly. The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2311 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2303 is supplied, and the game ball is supplied from the first stage 2311. A second stage 2312 capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 605.

  The first stage 2311 and the second stage 2312 are formed in curved surfaces such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center of the first stage 2311 in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is formed on the flange portion 2300a of the center accessory 2300. It is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2314 on the lower front surface. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are accepted into the first start opening 2001 with high probability. (Wins).

  Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 2300 has a first special symbol storage indicator 643 and a second special symbol storage indicator 644 of the function display unit 640 on the left and right sides of the chance exit 2314 below the stage 2310. A special symbol memory display unit 2315 different from the above is provided. In this special symbol memory display portion 2315, the numbers “1” to “4” on the left side of the chance exit 2314 and the numbers “5” to “8” on the right side are described and displayed in a translucent state. In addition, a special symbol memory display board on which color LEDs are mounted is arranged behind these numbers, and the first special symbol (the first special symbol acquired based on the winning winning of the game ball to the starting ports 2001, 2002) When the start memory of one special random number) and the start memory of the second special symbol (second special random number) are put on hold, the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of hold lights in a predetermined color in the order in which the hold is released (executed) By doing so, the reserved number can be guided to the player as “characters (numbers)”. Note that the special symbol storage display unit 2315 includes eight on-hold display units that can emit light independently for each of the symbols “1” to “8”, and “1” to “4” on the left side. "Is a first display group, and" 5 "to" 8 "on the right side are a second display group.

  In this embodiment, the success / failure determination random number acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 2001 is referred to as a first special random number, and the determination of winning / notifying acquired based on the winning at the second starting port 2002 is performed. The random number is referred to as a second special random number.

  Note that when the reserved special random number is the first special random number, the LED emits “red”, and when the second special random number is the LED, the LED emits “green”. It is possible to determine which of the starting ports 2001 and 2002 is the starting storage (holding) of the special random number. In this embodiment, the second special random number hold release (holding digestion) is prioritized over the first special random number hold release (holding digestion) through the processing by the hold order storage means 4940 described later. It has become. That is, the holding order storage means 4940 stores the first special random number starting storage based on the winning at the first starting port 2001 (holding by the first special symbol holding counter 4903) and the second starting based on the winning at the second starting port 2002. When both of the two special random number start-up memories (hold by the second special symbol hold counter 4913) exist, the winning determination process based on the second special random number is ahead of the winning determination process based on the first special random number. As is done, management related to replacement of the start-up memory digestion order is performed. Therefore, the starting memory of the second special random number is derived (so-called “holding digestion”) before the starting memory of the first special random number, and the order in which these special random numbers are digested is displayed in the special symbol memory display. This will be suggested by the light emitting display mode in the section 2315, details will be described later.

  Further, in the special symbol storage display unit 2315, the lottery result relating to the second special random number is not displayed in the second display group of “5” to “8” on the right side, and therefore “5” to “8”. The LEDs on the rear side of the second display group are LEDs that emit light only in “red” corresponding to only the first special random number, and on the rear side of the first display group of “1” to “4”. The LEDs are color LEDs that emit at least “red” and “green” corresponding to the first special random number and the second special random number, or two LEDs, a red LED and a green LED. Thereby, while being able to suppress the cost concerning LED in special symbol memory display part 2315, it can control that the control load concerning special symbol memory display part 2315 increases. Yes. In addition, when the special random number that is held is a normal random number that does not include probability variation information or time reduction information, the LED always lights up, and when the random number includes probability variation information or the like, the LED blinks in a predetermined cycle. Therefore, the player can recognize the possibility that “probability big hit” or the like has been drawn in advance, and the expectation can be enhanced.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a logo decoration body 2320 that displays the concept of the pachinko machine 1 at the top of the frame, and a center frame movable decoration body 2350 disposed in the frame above the warp entrance 2302. I have. Both the logo decoration body 2320 and the center frame movable decoration body 2350 can be decorated with light emission. The center frame movable ornament 2350 includes a character body 2351 that imitates a predetermined character closely related to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a center frame movable ornament that moves the character body 2351 in the vertical direction by the center frame motor 2352. A body drive mechanism 2354 (see FIG. 160).

  The center frame movable decorative body drive mechanism 2354 is not shown in detail, but a disk-like drive rotary plate fixed to the drive shaft of the center frame motor 2352 and a base end fixed to the drive rotary plate at the tip. A long eaves member 2355 that pivotally supports the character body 2351, a rotation restricting member 2356 that covers the front surface of the driving rotating plate and restricts the rotation angle end of the driving rotating plate, and the rotational position of the driving rotating plate. It mainly includes a position detection sensor 2353 for detection. The center frame movable decorative body 2350 has a position in which the character body 2351 (the heel member 2355) is substantially upright when the center frame motor 2352 is driven according to the game state or the like, and the character body 2351 is a frame in the center accessory 2300. It rotates within a range of a predetermined angle with the center position. Note that a notch 2300d is formed in the insertion wall 2300b corresponding to a position where the character body 2351 is substantially upright (see FIG. 165). The character body 2351, which is designed to be located as far as possible from the center and to which an inertial force is applied by the movement of the center frame movable decorative body 2350, collides with the thin plate-shaped insertion wall 2300b, and the insertion wall It is possible to prevent 2300b from being damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the center accessory 2300 has a configuration in which the inside of the frame is divided into two, and a large main window 2361 at the center is a liquid crystal display arranged on the rear side. Corresponding so that the device 1400 faces, the right vertically small sub-window 2362 faces the right movable body 3220 of the right movable decorative body 3200 in the back unit 3000 described later. The main window 2361 in the center accessory 2300 is closed by a transparent plate 2363 (see FIG. 156).

[2-5. Back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is arranged and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 630, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the panel holder 630 to the rear side by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. A back box 621, a left movable decorative body 3100 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, a right movable decorative body 3200 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, A lower movable decorative body 3300 disposed on the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the box 621, and an upper left movable decorative body 3400 and an upper right movable decorative body 3500 disposed on the upper left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621. , Mainly.

  As shown in the figure, the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 621a protruding outward at the front end. It is fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630 through the connector. Further, the back box 621 has a rectangular opening 621c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 621b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 621c can be viewed from the player side. Yes. Further, the back box 621 is provided with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the movable decorative bodies 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3606, 3030, 3032, 3034 and the like at appropriate positions.

  The left movable decorative body 3100 and the right movable decorative body 3200 in the back unit 3000 are movable in the vertical direction by the left movable body 3120 and the right movable body 3220 that are long in the vertical direction by driving the left motor 3110 and the right motor 3210, respectively. Can be done. Further, the lower movable decorative body 3300 can be rotated about a position below the liquid crystal display device 1400 by driving the lower motor 3310, and the solar movable lower movable body 3320 is liquid crystal display. It can appear or hide from the lower side of the device 1400 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 of the back unit 3000 are substantially horizontal in the left and right directions with the upper left movable body 3420 and the upper right movable body 3520 being substantially horizontal by driving the upper left motor 3410 and the upper right motor 3510, respectively. It can be rotated between a position where it is connected on a straight line (see FIG. 151) and a position where the upper left movable body 3420 and the upper right movable body 3520 hang down. Further, the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 are positioned so as to extend in a substantially horizontal direction, so that the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 disposed on the rear side is divided into two vertically. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display different effect images on the upper and lower sides of the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 that are substantially horizontal.

  Although the detailed illustration of the left movable decorative body 3100 in the back unit 3000 is omitted, a base member 3111 extending in the vertical direction and formed by bending a metal plate, and a rail support member 3112 fixed to both upper and lower ends of the base member 3111 The two rail members 3113 held in parallel at predetermined intervals so as to extend in the vertical direction by the upper and lower rail support members 3112 and the left movable body 3120 slidably held in the vertical direction by the two rail members 3113 The sliding member to be fixed, the rack gear provided at a predetermined position of the sliding member, extending in the vertical direction, the pinion gear meshing with the rack gear and pivotally supported by the base member 3111, and being arranged coaxially with the pinion gear. A transmission gear that rotates together with the pinion gear and is pivotally supported by the base member 3111, and a base portion that meshes with the transmission gear. A drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the left motor 3110 mounted to 3111, and a.

  Although not shown, the left movable decorative body 3100 has a detection piece protruding toward the base member 3111 on the sliding member, and a position where the detection piece is detected at a predetermined position of the base member 3111. A detection sensor 3130 is attached, and the moving position of the sliding member, that is, the left movable body 3120 can be detected by detecting the detection piece by the position detection sensor 3130.

  The left movable body 3120 in the left movable decorative body 3100 includes a movable body base that extends in the vertical direction and has a rear side opened, and a surface member that is attached to the front side of the movable body base and shaped like a rope. A left movable body decorative substrate 3123 mounted on the rear side of the movable body base and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light into the movable body base, and the movable body base is fixed to the sliding member. Thus, the left motor 3110 can move in the vertical direction. In addition, the movable body base and the surface member have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from the LED of the left movable body decoration substrate 3123.

  Further, the left movable decorative body 3100 further includes a plate-like cover member 3140 that is disposed between the left movable body 3120 and the rail member 3113 and covers the rail member 3113 and the front side of the base member 3111. The cover member 3140 has translucency, and has a relief formed by arranging a plurality of circles in a predetermined pattern on the surface, and covers the rail member 3113 and the base member 3111 so that they cannot be seen from the player side. The design can be improved. Although not shown in detail, the cover member 3140 is formed with a slit extending in the vertical direction, and the sliding member and the left movable body 3120 are connected through the slit.

  On the other hand, the right movable decorative body 3200 in the back unit 3000 is not shown in detail, but a base member 3211 that extends in the vertical direction and is formed by bending a metal plate, and a rail support member 3212 that is fixed to both upper and lower ends of the base member 3211. The two rail members 3213 held in parallel at predetermined intervals so as to extend in the vertical direction by the upper and lower rail support members 3212, and the right movable body 3220 slidably held in the vertical direction by the two rail members 3213. Are arranged on the same axis, a rack gear that is provided at a predetermined position of the sliding member and extends in the vertical direction, a pinion gear that meshes with the rack gear and is supported by the base member 3211, and the pinion gear. And a transmission gear that rotates together with the pinion gear and is pivotally supported by the base member 3211, and a base that meshes with the transmission gear. It comprises a drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the right motor 3210 attached to timber 3211, the.

  Although not shown in the right movable decorative body 3200, a detection piece that protrudes toward the base member 3211 is formed on the sliding member, and the detection piece is detected at a predetermined position of the base member 3211. A detection sensor 3230 is attached, and the moving position of the sliding member, that is, the right movable body 3220 can be detected by detecting the detection piece by the position detection sensor 3230.

  Further, the right movable body 3220 in the right movable decorative body 3200 includes a movable body base that extends in the vertical direction and has a rear side opened, and a surface member that is attached to the front side of the movable body base and shaped like a rope. A right movable body decorative board 3223 mounted on the rear side of the movable body base and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the movable body base, and the movable body base is fixed to the sliding member Thus, the right motor 3210 can be used to move up and down. In addition, the movable body base and the surface member have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from the LED of the right movable body decoration board 3223.

  Further, the right movable decorative body 3200 further includes a plate-like cover member 3240 that is disposed between the right movable body 3220 and the rail member 3213 and covers the front side of the rail member 3213 and the base member 3211. The cover member 3240 has translucency, and has a relief formed by arranging a plurality of circles in a predetermined pattern on the surface, and covers the rail member 3213 and the base member 3211 so that they cannot be seen from the player side. The design can be improved. Although not shown in detail, the cover member 3240 is formed with a slit extending in the vertical direction, and the sliding member and the right movable body 3220 are connected through the slit.

  As shown in the drawing, the left movable decorative body 3100 and the right movable decorative body 3200 of this example are shaped like a rope, and a hand for gripping the rope is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Further, the right movable decorative body 3200 is formed larger than the left movable decorative body 3100, and the left movable decorative body 3100 is disposed on the rear side of the game panel 600, whereas the right movable decorative body 3200 is arranged. Is in a state in which a part protrudes in front of the front surface of the game panel 600 through the frame of the center accessory 2300, and the size thereof is further emphasized. Further, as shown in the figure, the right movable decorative body 3200 is arranged such that the surface of the base member 3211 is oblique to the surface of the game board 4 (game panel 600) (the center side of the game area 605 has moved backward). Thus, the length of the right movable body 3220 in the left-right direction is longer than the space in the left-right direction for installing the right movable decorative body 3200, so that the larger right movable body 3220 can be provided. It has become.

  The lower movable decorative body 3300 in the back unit 3000 is supported by a base member 3311 that supports the lower motor 3310 and is fixed at a predetermined position in the back box 621, and a base member 3311, although detailed illustration is omitted. A drive gear 3312 fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower motor 3310, a first transmission gear meshing with the drive gear 3312 and pivotally supported by the base member 3311, and a first transmission gear arranged coaxially with the first transmission gear. And a second transmission gear 3314 having a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear and a driven gear 3315 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3314 and is pivotally supported by the base member 3311 and to which the lower movable body 3320 is attached. ing. The driven gear 3315 has a form in which the tooth portion is formed only within a range of about ¼ in the circumferential direction.

  In the lower movable decorative body 3300, a detection piece 3316 protruding radially outward is formed on the driven gear 3315, and a position detection sensor 3330 for detecting the detection piece 3316 is attached to a predetermined position of the base member 3311. In addition, by detecting the detection piece 3316 by the position detection sensor 3330, the rotational position of the driven gear 3315, that is, the lower movable body 3320 can be detected.

  Further, the lower movable body 3320 of the lower movable decorative body 3300 is fixed to the driven gear 3315 and has a container-shaped movable body base 3321 having an overall shape of the lower movable body 3320 and an open rear side, and a front side of the movable body base 3321. A reflector that is fixed and partitions the interior of the movable body base 3321 into a predetermined shape, a surface member 3323 that is fixed to the front side of the reflector and has a predetermined decoration formed on the surface, and a rear opening of the movable body base 3321 is closed and a plurality of front surfaces are closed. A lower movable body decorative board 3324 on which the LED is mounted, and a rear protection plate 3325 disposed on the rear side of the lower movable body decorative board 3324 and fixed to the rear side of the movable base 3321, and includes a lower motor. The lower movable body 3320 can be rotated within a range of a predetermined angle by driving 3310. In addition, the movable body base 3321 and the surface member 3323 in the lower movable decoration body 3300 have translucency, and the lower movable body 3320 is irradiated with light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the lower movable body decoration substrate 3324. The whole can be decorated with light emission.

  As shown in the figure, the lower movable ornament 3300 has an attacker unit 2000 disposed on the front side thereof, so that the lower motor 3310 is disposed at a position offset to the right with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game board 4. Since the lower motor 3310 is arranged as far as possible from the attacker unit 2000, the magnetism generated by the lower motor 3310 flows down in the magnetic detection sensor 3024 in the attacker unit 2000 and the game area 605. It is possible to avoid affecting the game ball to be played. Further, the lower motor 3310 is moved to the right side of the attacker unit 2000, in other words, the side where the flow area of the game ball in the game area 605 is brought to one of the left and right sides (left side) by the center accessory 2300. Since it is arranged on the opposite side (right side), the game ball hardly flows down in the area in the game area 605 corresponding to the lower motor 3310, and the movement of the game ball is influenced by the magnetism generated from the lower motor 3310. Can be reduced. When the lower motor 3310 is operated, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 3024 may be invalidated.

  Next, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper left movable decorative body 3400 in the back unit 3000 of the present example has a base member 3411 that supports the upper left motor 3410 and a rotation shaft of the upper left motor 3410 supported by the base member 3411. A fixed driving gear, a toothed portion that meshes with the driving gear is formed in a fan shape, is pivotally supported by the base member 3411, and is fixed to the upper left movable body 3420, and protrudes radially outward from the driving gear. And a position detection sensor 3430 that detects the detection piece and is supported by the base member 3411. In the upper left movable decorative body 3400, the upper left movable body 3420 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees by the rotation of the upper left motor 3410, and the position detection sensor 3430 detects the detection piece of the drive gear. Thus, the rotational position of the drive gear, that is, the upper left movable body 3420 can be detected.

  The upper left movable body 3420 of the upper left movable decorative body 3400 has a box-shaped movable body base 3421 whose one end is fixed to the driven gear and is elongated and opened at the rear side, and a plurality of movable upper bodies 3420 are arranged on the front surface. Upper left movable body decorative board on which the LED is mounted, a plate-like board cover 3423 for closing the rear end of the movable body base 3421, a curtain-like diffusion sheet lens disposed on the front surface of the movable body base 3421, and diffusion A lens member disposed on the front side of the sheet lens, and a through-hole having a predetermined shape (letters and symbols) fixed to the movable body base 3421 so as to cover the lens member and the diffusion sheet lens are disposed on the front side of the lens member. The surface member 3426 is provided. In this example, the movable body base 3421, the diffusion sheet lens, and the lens member are translucent, and the surface member 3426 is opaque, and the LED mounted on the upper left movable body decorative board By appropriately emitting light in a color, the through holes having a predetermined shape formed in the surface member 3426 are decorated with light emission, and predetermined characters and symbols are brought up.

  On the other hand, the upper right movable ornament 3500 in the back unit 3000 is not shown in detail, but is fixed to the base member 3511 that supports the upper right motor 3510 and the rotation shaft of the upper right motor 3510 that is supported by the base member 3511. A gear, a driven gear in which a tooth portion meshing with the drive gear is formed in a fan shape and is pivotally supported by the base member 3511 and the upper right movable body 3520 is fixed, a detection piece projecting radially outward from the drive gear, A position detection sensor 3530 that detects the detection piece and is supported by the base member 3511. In the upper right movable decorative body 3500, the upper right movable body 3520 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees by the rotation of the upper right motor 3510, and the position detection sensor 3530 detects the detection piece of the drive gear. Thus, the rotational position of the drive gear, that is, the upper right movable body 3520 can be detected.

  Further, the upper right movable body 3520 of the upper right movable decorative body 3500 has a box-shaped movable body base 3521 whose one end is fixed to the driven gear and is long and open on the rear side, and a plurality of front upper movable bodies 3520 are arranged on the front surface. A right upper movable body decorative board on which the LED is mounted, a plate-like substrate cover 3523 for closing the rear end of the movable body base 3521, a curtain-like diffusion sheet lens disposed on the front surface of the movable body base 3521, and a diffusion A lens member disposed on the front side of the sheet lens, and a through-hole having a predetermined shape (characters and symbols) fixed to the movable body base 3521 so as to cover the lens member and the diffusion sheet lens while being disposed on the front side of the lens member. The surface member 3526 is provided. In this example, the movable body base 3521, the diffusion sheet lens, and the lens member are translucent, and the surface member 3526 is opaque, so that the LED mounted on the upper right movable body decorative substrate. By appropriately emitting light in a color, the through holes having a predetermined shape formed in the surface member 3526 are decorated with light emission, and predetermined characters and symbols are raised.

  In the back unit 3000 of this example, the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 are disposed at a position closest to the liquid crystal display device 1400, that is, at a position deepest when viewed from the player side. A left movable decorative body 3100, a right movable decorative body 3200, and a lower movable decorative body 3300 are arranged in front of the decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500, and further, a center frame movable decorative body provided in the center accessory 2300. 2350 is arranged on the front side of the left movable decorative body 3100 and the lower movable decorative body 3300. As a result, the game board 4 as a whole has a movable decorative body 2350, 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500 arranged in a plurality of layers (here, three layers) in the front-rear direction. The movement of 2350, 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500 enhances the sense of depth and makes it possible for the player to be entertained, and at first glance different atmosphere compared to other pachinko machines The pachinko machine 1 can be a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, the right movable decorative body 3200 is formed larger than the left movable decorative body 3100, and is formed so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 600. The game board 4 as a whole is the same. The left movable decorative body 3100 and the right movable decorative body 3200 shaped as described above can give an impression that the left and right sides are symmetrical, while the right movable decorative body 3200 on the right side is enlarged to give an asymmetrical impression. It is a design that is hard to get tired of. Further, since the left movable decorative body 3100 and the right movable decorative body 3200 arranged on the left and right are moved in the vertical direction, the left movable body 3120 and the right movable body 3220 move to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In other words, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by the left movable body 3120 and the right movable body 3220 can be prevented from being difficult to see.

  Furthermore, since the sun-shaped movable lower decorative body 3300 is moved from the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the appearance of the sun-shaped movable movable body 3320 is surely detected by the player. The movement of the lower movable ornament 3300 can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced by the appearance of the sun-shaped lower movable body 3320. As will be described later, after moving to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in this way, the lower movable decorative body 3300 performs a predetermined movement effect (light emission effect) in cooperation with the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It has become.

  The back unit 3000 is arranged in the back box 621 on the rear side of the left movable decorative body 3100, the right movable decorative body 3200, the lower movable decorative body 3300, the upper left movable decorative body 3400, and the upper right movable decorative body 3500. A light emitting decorative body 3600 surrounding the outer periphery of the display device 1400 is provided. The light-emitting decorative body 3600 has a predetermined pattern formed on the surface in a relief shape, and has a translucent front decorative body 3602 and a rear surface of the front decorative body 3602, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the surface. The transparent and thin box-shaped lens member 3604, and a light emitting decorative substrate 3606 fixed to the rear side of the lens member 3604 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front side. The front decorative body 3602 of the light emitting decorative body 3600 includes a horizontally long upper decorative body 3602a disposed substantially along the upper side of the back box 621 on the upper front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the lower front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. A left lower decorative ornament 3602b and a right lower decorative ornament 3602c arranged on the left and right sides of the movable decorative body 3300, and a horizontally long upper decorative cover 3602d fixed to the front edge of the upper side of the back box 621 are provided. The front decorative body 3602 has a pattern in which a plurality of circles are arranged in a pattern, and the upper decorative body 3602a has a relief imitating a predetermined character or plant (pine or plum blossom). .

  In addition, the lens member 3604 in the light emitting decorative body 3600 is disposed at a position corresponding to the upper decorative body 3602a, and has a thin box shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the upper decorative body 3602a and whose rear side is open. A plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed at predetermined positions on the front surface. In this example, the lens member 3604 corresponding to the lower left decorative element 3602b and the lower right decorative element 3602c is omitted.

  On the other hand, the light emitting decorative substrate 3606 in the light emitting decorative body 3600 is fixed to the rear side of the lens member 3604 and fixed to the rear left side of the lens member 3604 and the upper left light emitting decorative substrate 3606a that decorates the left half of the upper ornament decorative body 3602a. It is fixed to the rear side of the lower right decorative element 3602c, the upper right light emitting decorative board 3606b for lighting the right half of the upper decorative element 3602a, the lower left light emitting decorative board 3606c fixed to the rear side of the lower left decorative element 3602b, and the lower right decorative element 3602c. And a lower right light emitting decorative substrate 3606d. Further, the light emitting decorative board 3606 includes a left middle light emitting decorative board 3606e which is disposed on the rear side of the right end of the cover member 3140 in the left movable decorative body 3100 and extends long in the vertical direction, and a left end of the cover member 3240 in the right movable decorative body 3200. A right middle light emitting decoration substrate 3606f disposed on the rear side and extending in the vertical direction; and a cover member 3140 of the left movable decoration body 3100 by the left middle light emission decoration substrate 3606e and the right middle light emission decoration substrate 3606f. The cover member 3240 of the right movable decorative body 3200 can be decorated with light emission.

  The light emitting decorative substrate 3606 of the light emitting decorative body 3600 further includes an upper light emitting decorative substrate 3606g disposed between the upper ornament decorative body 3602a and the lens member 3604 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The upper light emitting decorative substrate 3606g is attached to the front surface of the lens member 3604.

  The light emitting decorative body 3600 includes a lens member 3604 to which the upper left light emitting decorative substrate 3606a and the upper right light emitting decorative substrate 3606b are fixed, a left lower decorative element 3602b to which the lower left light emitting decorative substrate 3606c is fixed, and a lower right light emitting decorative substrate 3606d. The lower right decorative element 3602c to be fixed is fixed to the front surface of the rear wall 621b of the back box 621, and the rear wall of the back box 621 so that the upper decorative element 3602a sandwiches the lens member 3604. It is fixed to the front surface of 621b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed between the upper decoration body 3602a and the lens member 3604, and light from the LED is more widely diffused by the lens member 3604 by the gap, and the upper decoration. The decorative body 3602a is irradiated.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rear side of the attacker unit 2000 and is fixed to the back box 621 via the lower left decorative element 3602b and the lower right decorative element 3602c in the light emitting decorative element 3600. And a lower center decorative body 3610 having a surface imitating a cloud and a lower right decorative body 3612 disposed on the right side of the lower central decorative body 3610. The lower center decorative body 3610 includes a contact portion 3610a that comes into contact with the rear surface of the gaming panel 600 in a substantially linear shape. Can be prevented. Specifically, when adjusting a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game panel 600, the obstacle nail is implanted by adjusting the obstacle nail by hitting the obstacle nail using a predetermined tool. As described above, the transparent gaming panel 600 is thin and easy to bend about half as compared with the conventional product. Therefore, when the obstacle nail is struck for maintenance or the like, the gaming panel 600 bends and removes the obstacle nail. There is a possibility that it cannot be adjusted accurately. However, in this example, since the contact portion 3610a of the lower center decorative body 3610 is in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 600, it is possible to prevent the game panel 600 from being bent rearward, and during maintenance or the like. The obstacle nail can be adjusted accurately and quickly.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board box 3010 that houses a lamp drive board 3011 that is supported on the back side of the back box 621 and drives LEDs mounted on the decorative boards, and a rear surface of the lamp drive board box 3010. The left motor 3110, the right motor 3210, the lower motor 3310, the upper left motor 3410, the upper right motor 3510, the center frame motor 2352 of the center accessory 2300, and the left of the top lamp illumination unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 A motor drive board box 3012 that houses a motor drive board 3013 that drives a rotary lamp motor 245, a right rotary lamp motor 265, and a central rotary lamp motor 285, and a peripheral control board 4140 and a liquid crystal attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. A peripheral board 4010 composed of a control board 4150 is accommodated. A peripheral board box 622, and a, and inverter board box 3016 accommodating the inverter board 3017 attached to the upper peripheral board box 622 in the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is connected to a panel relay terminal plate 3030 for relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 4140 and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140, the right movable decorative body 3200, the light emitting decorative body 3600, and the like. Relay the left back relay board 3032 to relay, the left middle relay board 3034 to relay the connection between the peripheral control board 4140 and the lower movable decorative body 3300, and the upper left relay to relay the connection between the peripheral control board 4140 and the left movable decorative body 3100. And a substrate 3036. The panel relay terminal plate 3030, the left back relay board 3032, and the left middle relay board 3034 are fixed to the rear side of the rear wall 621b of the back box 621, and the upper left relay board 3036 is placed on the front surface of the lens member 3604. It is fixed.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 includes fixed pieces 1402 projecting outward on the lower side and the upper side, respectively. The fixed piece 1402 is fixed to the back box 621 by a lock member 3020, and is fixed to the rear side of the back box 621 by the lock member 3020 so as to be detachable. As shown in FIG. 155, the lamp driving substrate box 3010 is fixed to the back box 621 so as to be behind the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the liquid crystal display device 1400 is removed, the lamp driving substrate box 3010 is removed. Needs to be rotated.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 of this example is provided with a blower fan 3040 that is disposed in the lower part of the back box 621 and can blow air into the back box 621, thereby increasing the temperature in the back unit 3000. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. A liquid crystal control board 4150 for controlling image display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof. Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 2014 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic detection sensors attached to the gate sensor 2202, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from 3024 is input via the panel relay terminal board 3030 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2015 and the attacker solenoid 2016 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay terminal plate 3030, and the main control I / O The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, and the second special symbol storage display via the O port 4100b, the panel relay terminal board 3030, and the function display board 640a. A drive signal is output to the special symbol memory display unit 2315 of the display unit 644, the normal symbol display unit 645, the normal symbol storage display unit 646, the game state display unit 647, the round display unit 648, and the center accessory 2300.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and pachinko machines from this payout control board 1186 Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in its built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated at power-on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the decrease of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the payout control board 1186 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above-mentioned. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are configured.

  As shown in FIG. 166, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It is configured with. The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which will be described in detail later, receives various information (game information) related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the input of a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or the detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, it outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815 or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from the switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops driving signal to the payout motor 815 from payout motor drive circuit 4110d based on the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. And a firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  Note that the handle device 460 (operation handle unit 410) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 as described above, and touching the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle unit 410 touches the touch sensor. When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in the built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the peripheral control board 4140 for effect control in the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored are configured.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3011 or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4. A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp driving board 3011, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 and the right rotating lamp. Motor drive the door frame side motor drive command to output the rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary lamp motor 285 A game board side that outputs to the board 3013 or outputs a rotation drive signal to the center frame motor 2352, left motor 3110, right motor 3210, lower motor 3310, upper left motor 3410, and upper right motor 3510 provided in the game board 4 A motor drive command is output to the motor drive board 3013, a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c, and a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed on the liquid crystal. Or output to the control board 4150.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3011 and the motor driving board 3013. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3011 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., each lighting decoration board 3606 provided in the game board 4 or each movable decoration body 2350, 3100, a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500 and the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013 sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation lamp motor 245 and the right rotation lamp motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , And a center frame motor 2352, a left motor 3110, a right motor 3210, a lower motor provided in the game board 4 with a rotation drive signal output to the central rotary lamp motor 285 or based on the received game board side motor drive command. 3310, the upper left motor 3410, and the upper right motor 3510.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects the movable positions of the character body 2351, the left movable body 3120, the right movable body 3220, the lower movable body 3320, the upper left movable body 3420, and the upper right movable body 3520 of the game board 4 respectively. , 3130, 3230, 3330, 3430, 3530 are input via the motor drive board 3013, and based on these detection signals, the character body 2351, the left movable body 3120, the right movable body 3220, The original positions of the lower movable body 3320, the upper left movable body 3420, and the upper right movable body 3520 are grasped. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013, respectively, and the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 4150 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3011. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3011. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 through the lamp driving board 3011 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the peripheral board 4010, as shown in FIG. ROM 4150b, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. Then, the VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b generates various screens for rendering, for example, a design variation effect displayed in the central main display region and a hold related effect displayed in the lower region of the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In addition to the program, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by main scanning for setting the state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing the main scanning in a direction intersecting with one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, liquid crystal display is performed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 3017.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a functional configuration of the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 167, the main control board 4100 includes a gaming state control means 4934, a first special symbol lottery means 4900, a first special symbol display control means 4702, and a first special symbol hold display control means 4930. First special symbol hold counter 4903, second special symbol lottery means 4910, second special symbol display control means 4704, second special symbol hold display control means 4932, second special symbol hold counter 4913, hold Random number storage area 5131 for success / failure determination, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 4715, opening / closing operation control means 4938, opening / closing device operation processing means 4714, normal symbol lottery means 4920, normal Symbol display control means 4716, normal symbol hold display control means 4718, normal symbol hold means 4923, movable piece opening A control unit 4928, and a, a command transmitting unit 4946. In the present embodiment, the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 may be referred to as “first special symbol (first special random number) start-up storage”. Also, the lottery suspension by the second special symbol lottery means 4910 may be referred to as “starting storage of the second special symbol (second special random number)”.

  Here, the gaming state control means 4934 is a part that determines which gaming state is the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, the normal gaming state in which neither the probability changing function nor the time reduction function is activated, the special gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time saving function are activated, and the time reduction in which only the time saving function is activated. The game state is controlled to any one of the game states. Here, when the probability changing function is activated, the winning / non-winning determination process is performed with a winning probability that makes it easier to win the jackpot than when the probability changing function is not activated. Therefore, the expectation for the jackpot is increased, which is advantageous to the player. When the time reduction function is activated, the pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed more frequently than when the time reduction function is deactivated. Therefore, the game ball is easily received by the second starting port 2002, and the player Is advantageous.

  Further, the first special symbol lottery means 4900 is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599) when the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2011 based on the winning of the first start port 2001. One random number among the random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is to be acquired is acquired by the first special symbol determining random number acquiring unit 4902 (the random number for determining whether or not the random number is acquired by the first special symbol determining random number acquiring unit 4902) The first special random number). The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is a first special random number up to a first predetermined number (for example, four) by the first special symbol hold counter 4903. Deferred. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is released (a variation condition of the first special symbol as a predetermined start condition is established), random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure in the order of acquisition. Is transferred to the processing area 5132, and whether or not a big win is won by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 or whether a specific condition is satisfied (whether or not is determined) is stored in a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Determination is made based on the hit determination table 4906. In other words, whether or not the random number for determining whether or not the winning is obtained based on winning in the first starting port 2001 is determined when the first special symbol starts to change.

  Further, the second special symbol lottery means 4910 is configured such that when the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012 based on the winning of the second start port 2002, the game ball has won the first start port 2001 and Similarly, one random number among the random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is generated with a predetermined random number width (for example, 0 to 599) is acquired by the second special symbol determining / determining random number acquisition unit 4912 (second special). The random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the random number acquisition means for symbol determination 4912 is the second special random number). The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is a second special random number up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4) by the second special symbol hold counter 4913. Deferred. When the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is released (the variation condition of the second special symbol as a predetermined start condition is established), random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure in the order of acquisition. Is moved to the processing area 5132, and whether or not the jackpot is won by the second special symbol winning / failing determining means 4914 (whether or not determining) is determined based on the winning determination table 4906. In other words, the success / failure determination for the randomness for determination of success / failure obtained based on winning at the second start opening 2002 is performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. At this time, it is not determined whether the specific condition is satisfied.

  In this way, whether or not the game ball has won in either the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002 is held for the determination of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is held, and the release condition for the hold is established. Until this is done, the success / failure determination for the determination randomness is not performed (that is, the lottery process for the big hit is not performed). In addition, the go / no-go decision for the go / no-go decision random number is made for each go / no-go decision random number, and the go / no-go decision for the previous go / no-go decision random number has been completed (the change of the changing special symbol has been completed). On the basis of the above, a hold release condition is satisfied, and next, a determination on whether or not the random number for determination on hold is held is performed.

  In this embodiment, a soft random number generated by a control program executed by the CPU of the main control board 4100 is used as the random number for determination of success / failure, but is supplied from a random number generation circuit provided outside the CPU. Hard random numbers may be adopted.

Here, Table 1 shows the hit determination table stored in the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a.

  Here, when the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 is controlled by the gaming state control means 4934 to be in a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), the first special symbol winning / failing determination. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on a comparison between the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means 4902 and the normal determination time table (when the probability variation function is not activated) in the winning determination table 4906. In the present embodiment, as shown in Table 1, since 7 and 307 are jackpot values (random numbers determined to be jackpot winnings) at normal time (when the probability variation function is not activated), the first special symbol success / failure random number acquisition means 4902 It is determined whether or not the random number value obtained by the above is a jackpot value.

  On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to the special game state in which the probability changing function is activated, the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 4902 and the special game state in the hit determination table 4906 It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the comparison with the table (when the probability variation function is activated). In this embodiment, as shown in Table 1, 7, 77, 87, 97, 177, 187, 197, 207, 217, 277, 287, 297307, 377, 387, 397, 477, 487, 497, 507 are special. Since it is a jackpot value in the gaming state (when the probability variation function is activated), it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 4902 are those jackpot values. The big hit game is executed by the game execution means 4715.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is also controlled by the gaming state control means 4934 to a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on a comparison between the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means 4912 and a normal time table (when the probability variation function is not activated) in the hit determination table 4906. Further, when the game state is controlled to the special game state in which the probability variation function is activated, the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 4912 and the table when the probability variation function is activated in the hit determination table 4906 It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the comparison with. Thus, in this embodiment, the common table (the probability variation function inactive in the hit determination table 4906 is not activated) in the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 4904 and the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. Time table) is used. Therefore, also in this case, it is determined whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 4912 is a big hit random number. Will be executed.

  Note that, as described above, when a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002, the success / failure determination is not performed. That is, in this case, the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the random number acquisition means 4902 for the determination of first special symbol determination / prohibition determination (or the random number for determination of random determination of second special symbol determination 4912) is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of correctness / incorrectness determination, The counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 (or the second special symbol hold counter 4913) is counted up.

  Here, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 4910) separately from the special symbol lottery means. However, the lottery order that merges the two is not stored. That is, a lottery based on winning at the first starting port 2001 (so-called first special symbol holding ball) and a lottery based on winning at the second starting port 2002 (so-called second special symbol holding ball). The order in which the lottery results are derived when the both are present (in other words, whether the reserved balls are digested) is set by the holding order storage means 4940. Therefore, based on the order set by the holding order storage means 4940, the first special symbol lottery means 4900 (specifically, the first special symbol appropriateness determination means 4904) or the second special symbol lottery means 4910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 4904). The special symbol success / failure determination means 4914) determines whether the acquired random numbers are correct or not (performs the determination for each random number).

  The hold order storage unit 4940 according to the present embodiment includes the first special random number and the second special random number held in the success / failure determination random number storage unit 5131 regardless of the start winning timing to the start ports 2001 and 2002. Of these, the second special random number is preferentially executed (digested). The hold order storage unit 4940 first determines whether there is a second special random number that is held in the random number storage unit 5131 for determination of validity. As long as it is determined that the second special random number is present, the first special random number held in the validity determination random number storage unit 5131 is deferred, and the determination random number storage unit 5131 This is a part for managing the order of digestion of special random numbers so that all the second special random numbers held are digested sequentially. Accordingly, the second special random number, that is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2002 is preferentially executed (digested), and the pending lottery result is preferentially stored by the hold order storage unit 4940. The digested order is displayed on the special symbol memory display unit 2315.

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is determined to be a big hit, the symbol random number (for example, 0 to 99) acquired by the symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). The value of one random number of design random numbers generated with a random number width is confirmed.

  Of these, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904, if the random number of the symbol random number is 0 to 39, (1) first long open jackpot (normal (non-probable change) ) Big hit), and if it is 40-79, it will be judged as (2) second long open big hit (probable variation big hit), and if it is 80-99, it will be judged as (3) short open big hit (per probable small value). The

  On the other hand, when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 4914, if the random number of the symbol random number is 0 to 2, 39 to 68, (1) the first long open jackpot ( Normal (non-probable change) big hit), and if it is 3 to 38, 69 to 99, (2) the second long open big hit (probability big hit) is determined.

  As described above, the winning type when the jackpot is won between the lottery based on the winning at the first starting port 2001 and the lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 2002 (the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot game) By making the selection ratios different from each other, the expected value (expected value of the number of game balls to be paid out) given in the jackpot game given according to the result of the success / failure determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 491 is It is set higher than the expected value in the jackpot game given by the one special symbol success / failure determination means 4904. Thereby, the lottery based on the winning at the first starting port 2001 is positioned as a disadvantageous lottery than the lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 2002. The contents of the winning types (1) to (3) are as follows, for example.

(1) “First long open jackpot” is a display image of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in which an effect image (for example, a combination of three blue symbols) indicating that the jackpot (especially the first long open jackpot) has been won. The long open big hit (the big hit game in which the player is prompted to pay out the first predetermined amount of game balls) is opened and closed by the long open big hit game execution means 4715a. ) Is executed. The player can win a lot of prize balls by winning the game balls in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Note that each round operation ends when, for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 winning balls are counted. The jackpot game ends when the round operation ends 15 times. After the jackpot game is over, the probability variation function is not activated, and the next jackpot lottery probability is set to the normal probability, but the short-time function is activated for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol variations are performed). Thus, when the frequency at which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 on the side where the highly advantageous lottery is performed is changed to an easy state is increased compared to that in the normal game state, the short game state is controlled. Is.

(2) “Second long open jackpot” is a display image of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in which an effect image (for example, a combination of three red symbols) indicating that the jackpot (especially the second long open jackpot) has been won. The jackpot game similar to the above (1) is possible under the situation displayed in the above, but after the jackpot game is over, the probability change function and the time-shortening function are activated respectively, When the lottery probability is set higher than normal, and the frequency at which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 on the side where the highly advantageous lottery is performed is changed to the easy state is in the normal gaming state It is controlled to a special gaming state that can be further enhanced.

(3) “Short-opening jackpot” is a short-opening jackpot game execution means in a situation where an effect image (a combination of three symbols) indicating that the jackpot has been won is not displayed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. 4715b enables a short-open big hit game (a big hit game in which the player is not prompted to pay out the first predetermined amount of game balls) that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000, but after the big hit game ends When the probability changing function is activated, the next jackpot lottery probability is set higher than normal. In addition, when the short open jackpot is won when in either the short-time gaming state or the special gaming state, both the probability changing function and the short-time function operate until the next jackpot is won.

  In addition, the concrete numerical value said by said (1)-(3) is the best thing in implementation of this invention. In addition, these numerical values can be variously changed and are not limited by the best numerical values.

  On the other hand, if the random value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 4902 is not a big hit value, the first special symbol determination unit 4904 determines whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, as shown in Table 1, in the hit determination table 4906, the special condition establishment determination table at the normal time of the first special symbol (when the probability variation function is not activated) includes 99, 199, 299, 399. 499, 599 are stored as specific condition establishment values. Further, in the hit determination table 4906, the specific condition establishment determination table at the time of high probability of the first special symbol (when the probability variation function is activated) is the same table as the specific condition establishment determination table at the normal time of the first special symbol. Thus, 99, 199, 299, 399, 499, and 599 are stored as specific condition satisfaction values in the table for determination of specific condition satisfaction when the probability changing function of the first special symbol is activated.

  When it is determined that the acquired random number is a random number that satisfies these specific conditions, the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened / closed by the opening / closing device operation processing means 4714 to approximate the opening / closing operation of the short opening big hit. The switchgear operating process is executed. Note that there is no change in the gaming state before and after the opening / closing operation, and the gaming state is maintained.

  Thus, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 4900, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function or the time reduction function is activated.

  Here, in the short-time gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, for example, a longer time is adopted as the opening time for the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2005 (promotion mode). The lottery frequency by the symbol lottery means 4910 is increased (the lottery opportunities for special symbols increase). In other words, the chance of winning the jackpot increases as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase as compared to the gaming state in which the short-time function does not operate. Accordingly, by not determining whether the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 4910, the execution of the short open big hit game that does not have any meaning in the special game state and triggers the transition to the special game state. The troublesomeness resulting from is not caused.

  On the other hand, in a gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, for example, a longer time is not used as the opening time for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2005, so the opening extension function is operating. There are fewer lottery opportunities for special symbols than in the gaming state. Here, since the opening / closing device operation process and the short open big hit game are very similar to each other, by increasing the frequency at which the specific condition is satisfied, the probability changing function is not activated when in the normal game state or the short time game state. The frequency of giving the player a sense of expectation is increased, and a variety of game characteristics can be realized.

  As described above, the specific condition may be satisfied when the winning decision is lost in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 4900, while the result of the pass / fail judgment in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 4910 is satisfied. Regardless of the gaming condition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by preventing the specific condition from being satisfied.

  By the way, the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 or the second special symbol determination unit 4914 is obtained by the first special symbol display control unit 4704 or the second special symbol display control unit 4704 by the first special symbol display unit 641. Or it is displayed on the second special symbol display 642. However, since the display is displayed in a form that cannot be recognized as character information by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs, the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is determined by the player. It is difficult to grasp.

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 or the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is stored by the first special symbol hold display control means 4930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 4932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 643 or the second special symbol memory display 644.

  The big hit game execution means 4715 and the opening / closing device operation processing means 4714 execute the big hit game or the opening / closing device operation processing based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914. Here, the jackpot game is a game accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the opening / closing device operation processing is a game not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is a big hit, and from one gaming state to the one gaming state. A change (transition) to a gaming state advantageous to the player is possible only when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the normal gaming state to the short-time gaming state (or special gaming state) is a condition that the condition device operates. Therefore, the gaming state does not change when the opening / closing device operating process is executed. For example, when the opening / closing device operating process is executed in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues and the short-time gaming state (or Even if the opening / closing device operation process is executed in the special game state), the short-time game state (or special game state) continues.

  However, a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery (whether or not to change to an unfavorable gaming state by a player) or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times. is there.

  Here, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is a big hit, the jackpot game execution means 4715 operates the attacker solenoid 2016 by the opening / closing operation control means 4938. The opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened and closed to execute a jackpot game.

  As described above, as the types of jackpot games, as described above, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 (for example, 30 sec) is relatively long, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 (for example, 0.6 sec) is relatively There is a short short-open big hit game. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, the long open as the big hit game execution means 715 The jackpot game execution means 4715a executes a long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is a short open big hit, the short open big hit game execution means 4715b as the big hit game execution means 4715b is short. Perform an open jackpot game.

  Here, the long open big hit game is, for example, a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 4938 for 15 rounds. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 4938 for two rounds. When a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006, the number of winning balls is counted by an appropriate count sensor. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out to the tray through control by the payout control board 1186.

  Note that the types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpots and short-open jackpots, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of times of opening is relatively There may be a large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example, it may be 0.3 sec).

  Here, “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing member 2006 at the time of the big hit game, and after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened, the closing condition is established from the opened state until the opening / closing member 2006 is closed. Round. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened, or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing member 2006. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing member 2006 is closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short open big hit game is that 0.6 sec elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened, or three game balls win.

  The closing conditions for the opening / closing member 2006 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can win the opening / closing member 2006 until a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened. It is preferable. On the other hand, it is preferable that the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can be awarded to the opening / closing member 2006 while the opening / closing member 2006 is barely opened during the short opening big hit game.

  Thus, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 4904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 4914 is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is a long open jackpot and a short open jackpot The profits given to the players are greatly different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing member 2006. On the other hand, if the winning jackpot type is a short open jackpot, it is possible that one or two game balls can be won by the opening / closing member 2006. Thereby, the profit given to the player is greatly different between the case where the long open jackpot game is executed and the case where the short open jackpot game is executed.

  When the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 4904 is out and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing device operation processing unit 4714 is very similar to the short open big hit game. Then, an opening / closing device operating process for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2006 is performed. The “similarity (approximate) mode” includes both the mode that is exactly the same as the short open jackpot game and the mode that is very similar to the short open jackpot game.

  It should be noted that the “extremely similar mode” means that the appearance is such that the player cannot determine whether the short open big hit game or the open / close device operation process has been performed simply by viewing the open mode of the open / close member 2006. It means that it is an aspect similar to the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result determined by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 is out of the range and the specific condition is determined to be satisfied, 0. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed twice under the condition that 6 seconds have elapsed or three game balls have been won (the opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing member 2006 in the big hit game is “round”) In contrast, the opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing member 2006 in the opening / closing device operation processing is referred to as “time”).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sound effects and effect sounds output from the speakers 144 and 341 are the short-open big hit based on when the opening / closing device operation processing is completed and the short open big hit. They are very similar to each other when the game is over. Further, “very similar” means not only the same thing but also a very similar thing.

  In this way, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 mainly performed in the normal game state, there is a possibility that a specific condition may be satisfied even if the big win is not won, and the short open big hit game Since the opening / closing device operation process is very similar to each other, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player has shifted to the special game state at a higher frequency than the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal game state. .

  Further, the jackpot determination by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 is performed separately from the determination of establishment of the specific condition. Here, assuming that the determination of establishment of the specific condition is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful, the winning determination of the jackpot is not performed when the specific condition is satisfied. In other words, the determination of establishment of the specific condition is based on the premise that the result of the jackpot winning / non-winning determination by the first special symbol winning / failing determining means 4904 is out of place, so the determination of whether the specific condition has been satisfied is preliminarily made prior to the determination of the jackpot winning / failing determination. If done, the opportunity to win a jackpot will be lost when certain conditions are met. Therefore, by determining whether or not the jackpot is successful prior to the determination of the establishment of the specific condition, in the lottery of all the special symbols performed by the first special symbol lottery means 4900, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined. Reduction can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is set higher than the winning probability of winning the jackpot, and it is not possible to grasp whether the opening / closing device operating process is being executed or whether the short opening jackpot game is being executed. . Therefore, each time a specific condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the player can have a sense of expectation that he / she has won a short open jackpot that may cause the probability variation function to operate, which reduces the interest level. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the same special table is not necessarily used as the table used for the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 and the second special symbol determination unit 4914. The first special symbol determination unit 4904 and the second special symbol determination unit 4904 are not necessarily used. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 4914. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 4910. Further, the mode of jackpot game when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 and the mode of jackpot game when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 4910 (for example, given to the player) It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ.

  Next, the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 4920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 2201 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202, the normal symbol lottery means 4920 receives one random number among the normal symbol determination random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol determination. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 4922 for determination. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 4923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 4923 releases the hold, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not.

  Here, when the gaming state control unit 4934 is controlled to a gaming state in which the time-shortening function does not operate, the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 4924 and the random number value acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 4922 and the normal symbol value Based on the common chart determination table 4926, it is determined whether or not the normal winning is won. In addition, in the normal ordinary figure determination table 4926 according to the present embodiment, the winning random number value “250” when being controlled in a gaming state in which the time-saving function is not activated and the normal symbol when being controlled in the same gaming state. When the normal hit is won when the game is controlled to the same gaming state, the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 2005 opens and closes (for example, the opening time is “180 msec”). Is opened and closed once).

  That is, when the game state is controlled such that the time-shortening function does not operate, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924 uses the random number value acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 4922 based on the normal general symbol determination table 4926. Is “250” as the hit random number value. Then, after the lottery process related to the winning for the normal winning is performed with the winning probability of “1/251”, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924 receives the winning information indicating the result of the lottery process and the above-mentioned normal normal winnings. The normal symbol display control means 4716 which transmits the normal symbol change time “4000 msec” acquired from the figure determination table 4926 is transmitted to the normal symbol display control means 4716. As a result, the normal symbol display control means 4716 performs control (control based on variation time information) in which the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 645 is variably displayed for the variation time “4000 msec” of the normal symbol. become. Further, after the variation display is performed for the variation time “4000 msec”, the control for stopping and displaying the normal symbol (control based on the winning information) is performed so that the lottery result is suggested.

  In the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924, the acquired random number value is “250” as the winning random number value, and the normal winning is won when the gaming state is controlled so that the time-shortening function does not operate. When the determination is made, operation mode information indicating an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 2005 opens and closes is transmitted to the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928. Thus, the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928 performs control (control based on operation mode information) such that the pair of movable pieces 2005 is opened / closed only once in the opening time “180 msec” through the start opening solenoid 2015. (During normal time) In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 can enter the second start port 2002 only during the time when the opening / closing operation is controlled. However, such control by the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928 is performed after the normal symbol display control means 4716 has stopped the normal symbol (in this case, a stop display suggesting a normal hit). That is, in this case, it is avoided that the pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened / closed without the player being informed of the lottery result for the normal winning. In this embodiment, the pair of movable pieces 2005 is moved after a predetermined interval period (for example, “200 msec”) has elapsed since the normal symbol was variably displayed for the variation time “4000 msec” and then stopped. The opening / closing operation is performed only once at the opening time of “180 msec”. By providing such an interval period, the player can play the game with a relatively sufficient margin until the pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  Here, the second starting port 2002 when the pair of movable pieces 2005 are in the open / close operation is easier to receive the game ball than the first starting port 2001. In this state, When a predetermined number of game balls are driven into the game area 605, the number of game balls received at the second start port 2002 is greater than the number of game balls received at the first start port 2001. However, when the gaming state is controlled so that the time-saving function is not activated, the winning probability per normal is “1/251”, the normal symbol variation time is “4000 msec”, and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 2005 is “ Even if the game is continuously performed by “180 msec”, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 2002.

  On the other hand, if it is a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (short-time gaming state, probability variation gaming state), the normal symbol winning / nothing determination unit 4924 determines whether or not the random symbol value obtained by the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number acquiring unit 4922 is released. This is performed based on the extended common map determination table 4927. In addition, in the open extension general figure determination table 4927 according to the present embodiment, the winning random number values “1” to “250” when the gaming state is controlled to operate and the gaming state are controlled. When the normal winning pattern is won when the normal symbol variation time “1000 msec” when the game is being controlled and when the normal winning is won (for example, opening) Opening and closing operations only three times at time “1500 msec” are stored. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated, the time required for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2005 is set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It is possible to play so that it can be opened and closed.

  In other words, when the game state is controlled so that the time reduction function is activated, the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 4924 obtains the random symbol acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition unit 4922 based on the open extended general symbol determination table 4927. It is determined whether the numerical value is any one of “1” to “250” as the hit random number. Then, after the lottery process for winning for the normal winning is performed with the winning probability of “250/251”, the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924 receives the winning information indicating the result of the lottery process and the above-mentioned extension of the opening. The fluctuation time information indicating the fluctuation time “1000 msec” of the normal symbol acquired from the common symbol determination table 4927 is transmitted to the normal symbol display control means 4716. Thus, the normal symbol display control means 4716 performs control so that the symbol displayed on the normal symbol indicator 645 is variably displayed for the variation time “1000 msec” of the normal symbol (control based on variation time information). become. In addition, after the fluctuation display is performed for the fluctuation time “1000 msec” in this way, the control for stopping and displaying the normal symbol (control based on the winning information) is performed so that the lottery result is suggested.

  In the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924, when the acquired random number value is any one of “1” to “250” as the winning random number value, and is controlled in a gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated. When it is determined that the normal winning is won, operation mode information indicating an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 2005 opens and closes is transmitted to the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928. Accordingly, the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928 performs control (control based on operation mode information) in which the pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed only three times during the opening time “1500 msec” through the start opening solenoid 2015. (Promotion mode) In addition, the time when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 is controlled to be opened and closed is “4500 msec” (when the pair of movable pieces 2005 is opened a plurality of times, the opening and closing of each of the plurality of times is performed. It is possible to enter the second starting port 2002 only for the time added). However, in this case as well, such control by the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928 is performed after the normal symbol display control means 4716 has stopped the normal symbol (in this case, a stop display suggesting a normal hit). Is called. In the gaming state in which the short-time function according to this embodiment is activated, a predetermined interval period (for example, “200 msec”) has elapsed since the normal symbol was variably displayed for the variation time “1000 msec” and then stopped. Later, the pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed only three times in the opening time “1500 msec”.

  As described above, the normal symbol winning / probability determination unit 4924 stored in the normal normal symbol determination table 4926, the normal winning probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 2005 ( The opening / closing time) is set so that the second starting port 2002 when the game is controlled so that the time saving function is not activated makes it difficult to win the game ball itself. On the other hand, the normal symbol winning probability by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 4924 stored in the open extended general symbol determination table 4927, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 2005 (Opening / closing time) is set so that the second starting port 2002 is easier than the first starting port 2001 to accept the game ball when the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated is controlled. ing. Thereby, when in the gaming state in which the time-shortening function is activated, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 2002 is dramatically improved as compared to the gaming state in which the time-shortening function is not activated, As a result, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 becomes higher than the winning frequency of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, the player can enjoy the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls. Furthermore, the special symbol lottery opportunities on the second start opening 2002 side are dramatically increased, the expectation that a more advantageous lottery will be performed is increased, and the decrease in interest in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated is suppressed.

  Here, the normal map determination table 4926 and the open extended map determination table 4927 are both stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 166).

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 4924 is determined to be a win even in a gaming state in which the time reduction function does not operate, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2005 can be executed. Alternatively, the hit probability may be zero when the game state is such that the time-saving function does not operate. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2005 may be performed only in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. Conversely, the determination of success / failure by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 4924 may be such that the winning probability per normal is “100%” in the gaming state in which the time reduction function is activated.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 4924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 645 by the normal symbol display control unit 4716. The number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 4923 is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 646 by the normal symbol hold display control means 4718.

  As described above, the movable piece opening / closing control means 4928 operates the start opening solenoid 2015 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2005 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol adequacy determination means 4924 is a win. However, as described above, there are a pair of movable in the game state in which the short-time function is activated (probability game state, short-time game state) and in the game state in which the time-short function is not activated (normal game state). The opening / closing operation mode of the piece 2005 is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 2005 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball to the second starting port 2002. However, in the open state in which the pair of movable pieces 2005 are operated, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2002 is easier than the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Note that when the pair of movable pieces 2005 are in a closed state where they are not operating, it is not always possible to win a game ball to the second start port 2002, and it is not necessary to win a game ball to the first start port 2001. If it is more difficult.

  The command transmission unit 4946 transmits the lottery result information (result information of the determination process) by the first special symbol determination unit 4904 or the second special symbol determination unit 4914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral control board 4140. . The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to information on the result of special effect determination processing, which will be described later, information on the variation time of decorative symbols performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like.

  It should be noted that the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 4904, the second special symbol determination unit 4914, and the normal symbol determination unit 4924 does not necessarily include a loss.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167, the peripheral control board 4140 includes command receiving means 4950, effect lottery means 4960, and effect control means 4962.

  The command receiving means 4950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol appropriateness determination means 4904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination means 4914 transmitted from the main control board 4100 and information related to the determination result.

  In addition, the effect lottery means 4960 provides an effect mode to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, an effect sound output from a speaker, an effect sound such as music, and various lamps. It is a part which determines the production mode etc. in a luminous decoration.

  Further, the effect control means 4962 is a design effect control means for controlling the symbol effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as the effect mode determined by the effect lottery means 4960, and an effect mode to be executed as a hold related effect described later. Hold effect control means for controlling. In addition to the design effect and the hold-related effect, the effect sound and display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal board so that they are output from the speaker and the frame decoration lamp. Furthermore, light emission and driving of the light emitting decorative body are also controlled via the decoration control board.

  The hold effect control means includes a hold digest status expression means for expressing the hold status changed by digesting the first special random number or the second special random number (performance determination processing is performed), and a special effect determination described later. An advantageous effect indicating that the special random number determined to be a winning based on the result of the processing is an advantageous effect that the player can expect (this disadvantageous effect is indicated as “disadvantageous”). The high-relevance lottery pre-indication means that indicates in advance prior to the success / failure determination and that the hold-related effect displayed when the result of the fake special effect determination process to be described later is a win. And fake hold display exposure effect control means for exposing in advance before the determination is made. The effects performed by these means will be described later.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 4100 in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 166) mounted on the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 168, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, is backup data stored in the backup RAM (storage area where various control data are backed up by the constant supply of power) built in the main control MPU 4100a being normal ( It is determined whether or not it is the set value at the time of power failure. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area to the backup RAM, and also stores the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. By reading back to, a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup RAM) is normal, a process (recovery process) for returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data is executed. To do. On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data is deleted. Then, after that, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the processing area with respective initial parameters (initialization processing). . Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  Note that the current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be matched (the peripheral control board 4140 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, with regard to the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the variation of the special symbol, a command is transmitted for information about the variation pattern described later at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. ing. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the processing area of the RAM with respective initial parameters. Processing). In the state in which such initialization processing is performed (at the time of initial), the control data indicating the winning probability of the jackpot comes to indicate the first probability (low probability), and the control data indicating the current gaming state Indicates a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which both the time-shortening function and the probability changing function are not activated. Therefore, if the pair of movable pieces 2005 is operated at the initial time, the pair of movable pieces 2005 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal time mode).

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated when such initialization processing is executed is set in a state where it can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Processing is also performed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. The backup data is also stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off), for example, when the amusement store is closed, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, it is first determined whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is being supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  When the power interruption occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM in order to start the power outage. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the RAM processing area is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the RAM backup area (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, the power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power failure, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the RAM backup area. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM may be a backup area (backup RAM) in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main system processing. In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 4100a performs the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring processing in step S60, processing for monitoring detection signals of the above-described various sensors (gate sensor 2202, first starting port sensor 2011, second starting port sensor 2012, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 645 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 2202 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2005 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processes from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game are executed, and a process for performing the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member of the attacker is executed.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for success / failure determination (random number for success / failure determination), a design random number, a random number for reach determination (dedicated random number at the time of defeat), a variation pattern random number (random number for variation pattern determination) and There is a random number for determining whether or not an ordinary symbol is appropriate.

  The random number for determination of success / failure is a random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game or a switching device operation process. The symbol random number is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot (first long open jackpot, second long open jackpot, short open jackpot) when it is determined that a jackpot game will be generated. The reach determination random number is not a big win (that is, missed) in the determination of success / failure, and it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied if the determination of success / failure is based on winning the first start port 2001. Sometimes it is a random number used to determine whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2005 to the open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is displayed and controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 or the liquid crystal mounted on the liquid crystal control board 4150. You may make it determine by control MPU4150a (all refer FIG. 166). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  In the winning random number update process, among these random numbers, whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2005 in an open state in which it is easy to accept a winning / decision random number, a design random number, and a game ball related to the occurrence of the jackpot game or the switching device operation process. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. Here, the random number used for the determination regarding whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 2005 is controlled to be opened is updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to generate jackpot game or switchgear operation processing, probability to control the pair of movable pieces 2005 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is constant. (That is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased due to aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 4100 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not is correct, the counting is started next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a random number acquisition means for first special symbol determination 4990 and a random number acquisition means for determination of second special symbol 4912. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120), the fluctuation occurs. A start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the jackpot game or the switching device operation process, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 641 or the second special symbol display unit 642 and the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined, and the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. Corresponding variation time (the time from when the special symbol variation display is started in one of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 until the stop display) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big start is made in the fluctuation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the process selection flag is set to “3”. The process selection flag is updated to “0” if neither the big win nor the determination that the specific condition is satisfied has been made. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the type of jackpot game (long open or short open) is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time and the game for controlling the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 according to the type. The number of balls to be awarded is set and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220) is executed. In this opening / closing device operation process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be won, and the jackpot game ends. In this case, it is determined whether or not the probability changing function or the time reduction function is to be activated, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the opening / closing device operation process (step S250) is executed. In the opening / closing device operation process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the number of times of opening, the opening time, and the limited number set in the processing when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220). When the process ends, a process for updating the process flag to “0” is performed. Note that the opening / closing device operation processing is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like the jackpot game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to a short-open jackpot game that is a kind of jackpot game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 2002 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 2012 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 2002 (YES in step S1101). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2012, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the second start port 2002 (NO in step S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won the second starting port 2002, various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 4912) are stored. get. Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the main control MPU 4100a performs the second hold storage process (step S1103), and then step The process proceeds to S1104.

  In the second on-hold storage process, a process of storing various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start opening 2002 in the random number storage area 5131 for determination on success / failure, The process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is mainly performed.

  In the second holding process, in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 4903 or the second special symbol holding counter 4913 when winning the starting port 2001, 2002 is 1 or more. If it is (not including the current start prize) (that is, at least one start memory of the first special random number or the second special random number is stored) A determination process (hereinafter referred to as “special effect determination process”) is performed. The special effect determination process performed in the second hold storage process is performed using a random number for determining whether or not the game ball is won at the second start port 2002.

  Then, the result of the special effect determination process performed in the second hold process is a loss, and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 includes an upper limit value including the current start winning (the start of the second special symbol Only when the number of memories is the upper limit 4), the peripheral control board 4140 independently performs the determination process for determining whether or not to execute the fake special effect (hereinafter referred to as “fake special effect determination process”) (by the main control board 4100). Done independently of the process). Note that this fake special effect is performed using a random number for determining whether or not the winning is obtained by winning the starting ports 2001 and 2002.

  Note that the upper limit of 4 for the number of start memories for the second special symbol is one of the conditions for performing the fake special effect determination process. The longer the time until the determination is made, the longer it is possible to maintain the expectation that can be given to the player by performing the special effect and the fake special effect for a longer time. However, in this embodiment, it is one of the conditions for performing the fake special effect determination process that the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is an upper limit of 4, but instead of this, the first special symbol is used. The total value of the starting memory number and the starting memory number of the second special symbol may be four. Further, the number of starting memories is not necessarily limited to being stored up to the upper limit, and it is sufficient if the expectation that can be given to the player can be maintained.

  In the special game state, in the second hold process, the main control MPU 4100a further performs a process related to a mode effect described later. In the process related to the mode effect, the effect mode to be executed as the hold related effect is determined based on the design random number acquired by winning the game ball at the second start opening 2002. And the information determined in the process related to the mode effect (big hit type information) is a mode in which it is possible to grasp that the big hit type information is about the second special symbol, together with the hold number information, the command transmission process described above Then, a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the command transmission of the jackpot type information from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed immediately after the symbol random number is acquired (that is, whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure acquired together with the symbol random number is determined). The determination process is performed before the main control MPU 4100a performs. That is, the mode effect is performed when the hold cancellation condition has not yet been established. When command transmission is performed in this way, the jackpot type information that is the target of command transmission is manipulated to a state that can be deleted from the main control board 4100 (for example, a state where data can be overwritten).

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not, a random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area. Data is stored in each storage area.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won the second start port 2002 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number 4 has been reached (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2001 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence or absence of the game ball detection by the first start port sensor 2011 is confirmed. At this time, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2011, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 2001 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2011, it is determined that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2001 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won the first starting port 2001, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 4902) are used. It is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the main control MPU 4100a performs the first hold storage process (step S1106). The second start opening winning process is terminated.

  In the first hold storage process, a process of storing various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 2001 in the random number storage area 5131 for determination on success / failure, The process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is mainly performed.

  In the first holding process, in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 4903 or the second special symbol holding counter 4913 when winning the starting port 2001, 2002 is 1 or more. If it is (not including the current start prize) (that is, as long as at least one start memory of the first special random number or the second special random number is stored), a special effect determination process is further performed. The special effect determination process performed in the first hold storage process is performed using a random number for determining whether or not the game ball is won at the second start port 2002.

  Then, the result of the special effect determination process performed in the first holding process is a loss, and the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 4913 includes an upper limit value including the current start winning (start of the second special symbol) Only when the number of memories is the upper limit 4), the peripheral control board 4140 independently performs the determination process for determining whether or not to execute the fake special effect (hereinafter referred to as “fake special effect determination process”) (by the main control board 4100). Done independently of the process). Note that this fake special effect is performed using a random number for determining whether or not the winning is obtained by winning the starting ports 2001 and 2002.

  Note that the upper limit of 4 for the number of starting memories for the first special symbol is one of the conditions for performing the fake special effect determination process. The longer the time until the determination is made, the longer it is possible to maintain the expectation that can be given to the player by performing the special effect and the fake special effect for a longer time. However, in this embodiment, the first special symbol start memory number is 4 which is the upper limit, which is one of the conditions for performing the fake special effect determination process, but instead of this, the first special symbol The total value of the starting memory number and the starting memory number of the second special symbol may be four. Further, the number of starting memories is not necessarily limited to being stored up to the upper limit, and it is sufficient if the expectation that can be given to the player can be maintained.

  In the special game state, in the first hold process, the main control MPU 4100a further performs a process related to a mode effect described later. In the process related to the mode effect, the effect mode to be executed as the hold related effect is determined based on the design random number acquired by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001. And the information determined in the process related to the mode effect (big hit type information) is a mode in which it is possible to grasp that the big hit type information is about the first special symbol, together with the hold number information, the command transmission process described above Then, a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the command transmission of the jackpot type information from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed immediately after the symbol random number is acquired (that is, whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure acquired together with the symbol random number is determined). The determination process is performed before the main control MPU 4100a performs. That is, the mode effect is performed when the hold cancellation condition has not yet been established. When command transmission is performed in this way, the jackpot type information that is the target of command transmission is manipulated to a state that can be deleted from the main control board 4100 (for example, a state where data can be overwritten).

  Similarly to the various data acquired by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002, the various data acquired by winning the game ball at the first starting port 2001 are stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity. It is stored in each storage area.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1104 that the game ball has not won the first start port 2001 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number 4 has been reached (NO in step S1105), the first and second start opening winning processes are both terminated.

  In step S1102, when the game ball wins the second start port 2002, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is the upper limit value, the various data acquired in step S1101 are discarded. Similarly, in step S1105, when the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first start port 2001, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  Note that when it is determined that a game ball has won the second start opening 2002, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1101; What is necessary is just to perform between S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 4913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first starting port 2001, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Next, the special effect determination process and the fake special effect determination process performed in the second hold storage process (step S1103) and the first hold storage process (step S1106) will be described.

  The special effect determination process is based on the fact that a random number for success / failure determination is based on a game ball winning at the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 in a game state in which the probability changing function does not operate (normal game state, short-time game state). When acquired, it is performed by the main control MPU 4100a. When the result of the special effect determination process is a loss, a fake special effect determination process is further performed by the main control MPU 4100a using the acquired random number for determination of success / failure.

  Then, the result information of the special effect determination process and the result information of the fake special effect determination process are held in a manner in which it can be understood which of these result information is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Along with the number information, a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process.

  Here, the command transmission about the result information of the special effect determination process and the fake special effect determination process from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed immediately after the special effect determination process is performed (special effect determination process). If the result of is lost, it is performed immediately after the fake special performance determination process is performed). That is, the command transmission for the result information of the special effect determination process and the fake special effect determination process from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is a pass / fail determination for the random number for the pass / fail determination that is the target of the special effect determination process. The processing is performed before the main control MPU 4100a performs. In other words, both the special effect determination process and the fake special effect determination process are performed when the hold cancellation condition has not yet been established. When the special effect determination process or the fake special effect determination process is won, the special effect or the fake special effect is performed when the hold release condition is not yet established (that is, in the hold state). When command transmission is performed in this way, the result information subjected to the command transmission is manipulated to a state where it can be erased from the main control board 4100 (for example, a state where data can be overwritten).

  In the special effect determination process, for example, when one random number among the random numbers for success / failure determination generated with a random number range of 0 to 599 based on a winning at the first start port 2001 (game ball entry) is acquired, The success / failure is determined based on the acquired random number for determining whether or not the first special symbol is obtained and the special effect determination table 4908 stored in the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a.

Here, Table 2 shows a special effect determination table stored in the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a.

  For example, in the special effect determination table of the first special symbol in the special effect determination table 4908 (this table is mainly used in the normal gaming state where the first start port 2001 is won), the value per effect is 197. , 198, 199, 307 are stored. One jackpot value (307 in the present embodiment) out of the two jackpot values 7, 307 of the first special symbol in the gaming state where the probability variation function is not activated (the normal gaming state is also included) It is also included in the value per performance.

  Here, based on the winning at the first starting port 2001, only one random number for determining whether or not there is a hit is determined from 0 to 599. The ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value determined to be lost in the determination of whether or not ( The ratio of the per-effect value (1/3) to the effect lose value determined to be lost in the effect lottery process is set higher than 2/5/598). Thereby, when the result of the effect lottery process performed prior to the success / failure determination process is a win, the advantageous effect is advantageous in that the player has a higher expectation than when the result of the effect lottery process is lost Will be performed. From the point of view that the player can actually feel that it is advantageous when the advantage effect is performed, the ratio of the value per effect to the effect loss value determined to be lost in the effect lottery process is determined by the success / failure determination. Therefore, it is preferable that the value is set to be more than double the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value determined to be lost.

  The random number for determination of success / failure acquired by winning the first starting port 2001 when the player is in the normal gaming state that can mainly win the first starting port 2001 is any one of 197, 198, 199, and 307. In this case, the special effect flag is turned on. If the random number for determination of success / failure obtained by winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state is not one of 197, 198, 199, 307, the probability is 1/10. A fake special effect determination process for executing a fake special effect that can be won is performed. If the result of the fake special effect determination process is a win, the fake special effect flag is turned on. If either the special effect flag or the fake special effect flag is on, the special effect or the fake special effect is performed prior to the success / failure determination for the randomness for determination of success / failure acquired by winning the first starting port 2001. .

  It should be noted that the random number for success / failure determination acquired by winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state is not any of 197, 198, 199, and 307, and the result of the fake special effect determination processing is lost. (If neither the special effect flag nor the fake special effect flag is on), neither the special effect nor the fake special effect is performed, and the effect based on the result of the validity determination for the random number for the determination of success / failure Is just done.

  However, when the random number for success / failure determination acquired by winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state is “7”, the special effect is obtained even though the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit. And fake special effects may not be performed. Therefore, even if neither the special effect nor the fake special effect is performed prior to the success / failure determination for the acquired randomness for determination of success / failure, the sense of expectation for the jackpot is lost until the result of the success / failure determination is confirmed and displayed. Since there is not, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the winning determination random number acquired by winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state is “7”, the winning determination is made even though the determination result is a big hit. A fake special effect may be performed before the result of the determination is finalized. Although details will be described later, when a fake special effect is performed, an effect as if the result of the special effect determination process was a hit was made prior to the determination of the success / failure for the acquired random number for determination of success / failure, It is revealed to the player that the result of the special effect determination process is actually lost before the determination of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is made. At this time, although it is revealed that the result of the special effect determination process is lost, the player is discouraged once, but a confirmation display is made that the result of the determination of success / failure for the acquired random number for determination of success / failure is a big hit As a result, the player can be inflated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  According to Tables 1 and 2, in the special effect determination table 4908, included in the per-effect value (see Table 2) stored in the table used when winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state. In the table used when winning the second starting port 2002 in the normal gaming state, while the ratio of the jackpot value is one-quarter (only 307 of 197, 198, 199 and 307 are jackpot values). The ratio of the jackpot value included in the stored value for performance (see Table 2) is half (only 307 of 199 and 307 is the jackpot value). In this way, by changing the ratio of the jackpot value included in the performance hit value according to the start opening, the first start opening 2001 side and the second start can be performed without changing the game specifications such as the jackpot winning probability. It is possible to give a change to the game at the mouth 2002 side (the expectation of jackpot is higher when the special effect is performed at the second start port 2002 side).

  In addition, for example, when one random number is acquired from random numbers for success / failure determination generated in a random number range of 0 to 599 based on a winning at the second start opening 2002 (game ball entry), the acquired The success / failure is determined based on the random number for determining whether or not the second special symbol is determined and a table corresponding to the gaming state of the second special symbol in the special effect determination table 4908.

  For example, in the special effect determination table 4908, the table of the second special symbol in the short-time gaming state includes 7, 77, 87, 97, 177, 187, 197, 207, 217, 277, 287, 297, 307, 377, 387, 397, 477, 487, 497, 507 are stored. These per-effect values are the same as the jackpot value of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is operating. Note that the two jackpot values 7, 307 of the second special symbol in the gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated (the short-time gaming state is also included) are both included in the above-described effect winning value.

  Here, only one random number for determination of success / failure determination is acquired from 0 to 599 based on the winning at the second start port 2002, but the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value determined to be lost in the determination of success / failure ( The ratio (1/20) of the per-effect value to the effect loss value determined to be lost in the effect lottery process is set higher than 2/598). Thereby, when the result of the effect lottery process performed prior to the success / failure determination process is a win, the advantageous effect is advantageous in that the player has a higher expectation than when the result of the effect lottery process is lost Will be performed. From the point of view that the player can actually feel that it is advantageous when the advantage effect is performed, the ratio of the value per effect to the effect loss value determined to be lost in the effect lottery process is determined by the success / failure determination. Therefore, it is preferable that the value is set to be more than double the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value determined to be lost.

  Then, the random number for determining whether or not to win is obtained by winning the second start port 2002 when in the short-time gaming state, and 7, 77, 87, 97, 177, 187, 197, 207, 217, 277, 287, 297 are obtained. , 307, 377, 387, 397, 477, 487, 497, 507, the special effect flag is turned on. Then, the random number for determining whether or not to win is obtained by winning the second start port 2002 when in the short-time gaming state, and 7, 77, 87, 97, 177, 187, 197, 207, 217, 277, 287, 297 are obtained. , 307, 377, 387, 397, 477, 487, 497, 507, a fake special effect determination process for executing a fake special effect that can be won with a probability of 1/10 is performed. . If the result of the fake special effect determination process is a win, the fake special effect flag is turned on. If either the special effect flag or the fake special effect flag is on, the special effect or the fake special effect is performed prior to the success / failure determination for the randomness for the determination of success / failure obtained by winning the second start port 2002. .

  In addition, the random number for success / failure determination acquired by winning the second starting port 2002 when in the short-time gaming state is 7, 77, 87, 97, 177, 187, 197, 207, 217, 277, 287, 297. , 307, 377, 387, 397, 477, 487, 497, 507, and the result of the fake special effect determination process is lost (both the special effect flag and the fake special effect flag are on) Otherwise, neither the special effect nor the fake special effect is performed, and only the effect based on the result of the determination on the success / failure random number is performed.

  By the way, in the special effect determination table 4908, the per-effect value stored in the second special symbol time-short game state table is the value of the second special symbol probability change function operation (special game state) of the hit determination table 4906. It is exactly the same value as the hit value stored in the table. Therefore, when a special performance is performed in the short-time gaming state and the lottery result is lost, the player realizes that the lottery result was very confusing, “If it was a special gaming state, it was a win!” be able to.

  It should be noted that, in the short time game state in which the second start opening 2002 can be won mainly, the jackpot game is not performed unless a special effect is performed. In other words, unless a special effect is performed prior to the determination of the success / failure random number acquired by winning the second starting port 2002, the result of the determination of success / failure for the randomness for determination of success / failure may be a hit. Absent. However, in this embodiment, as in a conventional gaming machine, the effect determination based on the result of the determination of the success / failure for the random number for determination of success / failure is not performed with the expected effect for the big hit, but the determination of the success / failure is made from the time when the start winning is won. Expectation production is performed for a long time until the result is confirmed and displayed. Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, unless the hold release condition is satisfied (that is, unless the variable display is performed), the expected effect to the big hit was not performed, so only one hit determination random number for the big hit I could not perform the expected production. In this regard, in this embodiment, since it is possible to simultaneously perform a special effect for a plurality of random numbers for success / failure determination, the frequency of the expected effect is increased correspondingly, and the expectation for the big hit is constantly being made. It is possible to play games while hugging.

  By the way, as shown in Table 2, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the per-effect value in the normal gaming state includes a part of a plurality of jackpot values, Some of the missing values that do not fall under any of these are included. Therefore, the result information of the special effect determination process is “data indicating the degree of jackpot expectation determined from the ratio of the jackpot value to the value per effect”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to such a configuration, whether or not the main control board 4100 itself is won a big hit prior to establishment of the starting condition (for example, YES in step S120 and NO in step S1301). The special effect determination process for the effect value including not only the jackpot value but also the loss value is performed, and the result information is output from the main control board 4100. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the result information output from the main control board 4100 indicates winning of the per-effect value, a special effect (holding related effect) described later is performed. . For this reason, on the peripheral control board 4140 side, prior to the success / failure determination process in the main control board 4100 (without waiting for the result information on the success / failure determination process to be output from the main control board 4100), a false It is possible to notify the player in advance of the expected degree of jackpot (expected degree determined from the ratio of jackpot value to the value per stage). That is, in this case, even if it is a case where a jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination process performed in the main control board 4100 after that, the advance notice that the jackpot expectation level is truly suggested is assumed. Can be suitably suppressed. In addition, since the advance notice is performed from the time when the predetermined start condition is not established before the winning determination process for the jackpot is performed, the expectation for the jackpot is maintained for a long time. Can be realized.

  By the way, as to which one of the effect production and the disadvantage production is to be performed, a random number for success / failure determination acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 is used. It is determined depending on whether the result of the special effect determination process performed in the above is winning or losing. In other words, it is determined depending on whether it is classified into a high-precision production group as a group where the result of the special production determination process is a win or a low-precision production group as a group where the result of the special production determination process is lost. The

  Specifically, the per-effect values (197, 198, 199, 307) shown in Table 2 are high-definition effect groups, and the per-effect values (197, 198, 199, 307) are excluded from 0 to 599. The value is a low probability production group. That is, in the high-precision production group, the values included in the high-precision production group include a part of the lost value (197, 198, 199) in the random number range of 0 to 599 and the random number range of 0 to 599. Among them, only a part (307) of a plurality of jackpot values (7, 307) for which the result of the determination process is a jackpot.

  In this high-definition effect group, with respect to three per-effect values (197, 198, 199) corresponding to the loss value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is lost, the result is determined to be a jackpot value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot. One corresponding per-effect value (307) is set. Further, in the low-definition effect group, 595 effect values (values excluding 7, 197, 198, 199, and 307 out of 0 to 599) corresponding to the loss value at which the result of the success / failure determination process is lost are obtained. On the other hand, one effect value (7) corresponding to the jackpot value at which the result of the determination process is a jackpot is set.

  For example, when the random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 602 is “307”, the advantage effect is always executed. If the start-up memory is held when the success / failure determination random number is acquired, the advantage effect is also executed when the variable display related to the start-up memory is performed. As a result, it is possible to execute an advantageous effect as a special effect prior to the success / failure determination processing for the randomness for determination of success / failure obtained based on the winning of a game ball at the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2002. It becomes.

  Thus, in the advantageous mode in which the advantageous effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed with a probability of a quarter as understood from Table 2, and thus the acquired random number for determination of success / failure is “ In the case of “307”, the game related to the symbol variation is performed under a mode having a very high degree of advantage for the player.

  On the other hand, when the random number for determination of success / failure obtained based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 is “7”, the jackpot game is not performed without special effects. Is executed. In other words, when the jackpot game is executed without passing through the special effects, the probability that the jackpot game is executed is 1/596 as understood from Tables 1 and 2, which is very advantageous for the player. A game related to symbol variation will be played under an unfavorable mode.

  In this way, by performing a special effect prior to the success / failure determination process, the lottery process (specifically, the determination process) is performed with a high probability even though the lottery process (specifically, the determination process) is performed. An advantageous mode in which an effect that gives an impression as if processing is being executed is executed, and a disadvantageous effect that gives an impression as if lottery processing is being executed is executed with a low probability. It is possible to create an unfavorable mode. Therefore, as in the prior art, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a game with no sharpness being played under a gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated.

  In addition, by providing the special effect determination table as shown in Table 2, it is possible to realize the new gameability as described above without much design load.

  Note that the one lottery probability in the success / failure determination process is determined by the ratio between the number of jackpot values for which the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot and the number of lost values for which the result of the determination process is lost. In the present embodiment, as shown in the hit determination table 4906, out of the random number range of 0 to 599, the big hit that the result of the success / failure determination process becomes a big hit when the probability variation function is not operating (normal game state, short-time game state). While the number is two (7, 307), the number of losing values that result in losing is 598 (values in which 7 and 307 are excluded from the random number range of 0 to 599). Therefore, the lottery probability is 1/300.

  Note that the special effects described above are different from the continuous effects as seen in conventional gaming machines (effects that appear as if multiple variable displays were performed while being a single variable display). The higher the number of consecutive times, the higher the expectation. That is, the special effect of this embodiment is stored when a command including information indicating that the result of the special effect lottery process for the special symbol is a win is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. It differs from a continuous effect such as that found in conventional gaming machines in that the number of variable displays in which a special effect is performed differs depending on the number of start memories stored (the number of holds).

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 600. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 410, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 flows down from the left and right sides to the upper shelf 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the upper shelf 2301 moves to the left area of the center accessory 2300. It is induced. When the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the gate 2201 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202, the main control board 4100 is detected based on the detection signal. Then, an ordinary random number (ordinary symbol success / failure determination random number obtaining means 4922) is generated as an ordinary lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in red or green). . The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2005 that close the second start port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2002.

  Note that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2005 at the second start port 2002 may be changed according to the determination result of the special random number described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 2300, an area where game balls can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate 2201 or the warp inlet 2302. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Accordingly, the player plays the game by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 410 as appropriate so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2300. It is possible to suppress a gaming operation such that the player is strongly driven and to entertain a game by operating the original operation handle portion 410 of the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  By the way, in this example, when the normal symbol display unit 645 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the gate sensor 2202 detects the passing of the game ball, the normal symbol of the fluctuation is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first is stopped. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the holding number) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 646. This normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories according to the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2202 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 and have flowed down the left side of the center prize 2300 are drawn to the center of the game area 605 below the center prize 2300 by the shelf 2102 of the side prize port member 2100. It has become. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2004, 2101 disposed below the center bonus 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 controls payout based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command to store a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls. The tray 311 is paid out.

  Note that if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2003, the gaming area It is provided at the lower center of the left and right direction of 605 and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2004, 2101, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, or the big winning opening 2003, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp inlet 2302 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, the game ball is supplied to the first stage 2311 on the rear side of the stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300. It has come to be. The game ball supplied onto the first stage 2311 rolls on the first stage 2311 in the left-right direction, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage 2312. Also in the second stage 2312, the game ball rolls left and right and is released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2000. When the game ball supplied to the stage 2310 enters the central chance entrance 2313 in the first stage 2311, the game ball is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2314 arranged immediately above the first start port 2001 in the attacker unit 2000. Thus, the game ball is accepted into the first start port 2001 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 2011, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2310 are It can be received at the first start opening 2001 and the like with a high probability, and when the second start opening 2002 and the grand prize winning opening 2003 can be received, it is received when the game ball is released from the stage 2310 or the chance exit 2314. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2001 but also the second starting port 2002 and the grand prize winning port 2003 can be expected to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls, and can be enhanced. Yes.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate 2201 and is detected by the gate sensor 2202 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces 2005 that closes the second start opening 2002. When the game ball is received by the second starter port 2002 and detected by the second starter port sensor 2012 when the player can win a prize by expanding the predetermined time, the main control board 4100 and the like are passed through. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002 and is detected by the first starting port sensor 2011 and the second starting port sensor 2012, the first starting port is started. The opening 2001 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and the second start opening 2002 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2003 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311.

  Note that, in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the entry of the game ball into the gate 2201. When the special symbol is variably displayed or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is won at the start ports 2001 and 2002 and the first start port sensor 2011, When it is detected by the second starter sensor 2012, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starter sensor 2011 and the second starter sensor 2012 until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The special random number or the second special random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity, and the display thereof is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers To another start hole became Tokumoto, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 643 or the second special symbol memory indicator 644. Each of the first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. Further, the second special random number is executed (digested) in preference to the first special random number in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity, by the hold order storage unit 4940. That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2002 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2001.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, the center accessory 2300 is also provided with the special symbol memory display unit 2315 for displaying the number of the first special random number and the second special random number held, and the first special symbol memory display unit described above. In addition to 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644, the number of reservations and the order in which the reservations are consumed (executed) can be displayed. Specifically, on the special symbol memory display portion 2315, numbers from “1” to “8” are described and displayed in a state of translucency, and color LEDs are provided behind these numbers. The mounted special symbol memory display board is arranged, and when the first special random number or the second special random number is reserved, the number of LEDs corresponding to the reserved number emits light in a predetermined color. It is possible to guide the player as “characters (numbers)”. Note that when the reserved special random number is the first special random number, the LED emits “red”, and when the second special random number is the LED, the LED emits “green”. It can be known which of the starting ports 2001, 2002 is the special random number (lottery result). In addition, with respect to the reserved special random number, the second special random number is given priority over the first special random number in the hold order storage unit 4940 described later, and the hold is released (digested). The special random numbers (lottery results) are displayed on the special symbol storage display unit 2315 in the order in which they are digested. Therefore, in the special symbol memory display unit 2315, the lottery result relating to the second special random number is not displayed in the second display group of “5” to “8” on the right side. In addition, when the special random number that is held is a normal random number that does not include probability variation information or time reduction information, the LED always lights up, and when the random number includes probability variation information or the like, the LED blinks in a predetermined cycle. Therefore, the player can recognize the possibility that “probability big hit” or the like has been drawn in advance, and the expectation can be enhanced.

  In the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2012 and the special random number of the second special random number are stored by the holding order storage unit 4940. The special random number is either “lost” or “big hit” by collating with a predetermined random number determination table (generic name of the hit determination table and special effect table) determined in advance based on the order of pending suspension managed. It is also determined whether “big hit” is “2R big hit” or “15R big hit”. The random number determination table also determines (1) first long open jackpot, (2) second long open jackpot, and (3) short open jackpot.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 (special lottery In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 1400 being variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). The effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 641 and 642, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Pay attention to the design.

  As the effect image in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, there is “losing variation” in which all of the plurality of symbol sequences being varied are different from each other, and the symbol image is stopped and displayed while leaving one symbol sequence that varies. There is a “reach effect image” displayed so that the combination of symbols satisfies a specific condition (reach).

  In the present embodiment, the “reach effect image” includes a normal reach variation A, a normal reach variation B, a super reach variation A, a super reach variation B, and a special reach variation A. As a special lottery result in which these “reach effect images” are displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”.

  There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the above “reach effect image”, and that displays the remaining symbols that are variably displayed after the reach display. The “reach development effect image” includes super reach fluctuation A (development) and super reach fluctuation B (development). The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display relating to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Based on the determination result, the above-described loss variation, normal reach variation A, normal reach variation B, super reach variation A, super reach variation A (development), super reach variation B, super reach variation B (development), special The effect image is determined as one of the reach variations A, and the determined effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. These effect images are determined in the order of normal reach variation A, normal reach variation B, super reach variation A, super reach variation A (development), super reach variation B, super reach variation B (development), and special reach variation A in this order. The expectation level for jackpots increases (the expectation level for jackpots is the lowest for normal reach fluctuation A and the highest for special reach fluctuation A).

  By the way, when the special effect flag is ON (when the result of the special effect determination process described above is successful), the super reach variation A (development) is selected at a ratio of 60% regardless of the determination result. Then, the above-described super reach fluctuation B (development) is selected at a ratio of 30%, and the special reach fluctuation A is selected at a ratio of 10%. That is, when the special effect flag is on, a reach effect with a high expectation level that is a big hit is always performed, and a loss change or a normal change with a low expectation value for a big win is not performed.

  When the special flag is off and the result of the determination is correct (when the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by winning the first starting port 2001 in the normal gaming state is “7”). Normal reach fluctuation A is selected at a ratio of 3%, normal reach fluctuation B is selected at a ratio of 7%, super reach fluctuation A is selected at a ratio of 10%, and super reach fluctuation A (development) is a ratio of 25%. The super reach fluctuation B is selected at a ratio of 10%, the super reach fluctuation B (development) is selected at a ratio of 35%, and the special reach fluctuation A is selected at a ratio of 10%. Thus, when the result of the special effect determination is a win, only the reach effect image that is easy to be selected when the result of the success / failure determination is actually a win is selected even if the result of the special effect determination process is a loss. Therefore, the degree of expectation given to the player when the result of the special effect determination process is a win is large.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166). The symbol variation display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transparent plate-like gaming panel 600 held by the panel holder 630 and thinner than the panel holder 630 is fixed to the panel holder 630 via the back box 621. Since the contact portion 3610a of the lower central decorative body 3610 comes into contact with the game panel 600, even when the obstacle nail implanted in the front of the game panel 600 is maintained, the game panel 600 can be hit with a predetermined tool. Can be prevented from bending backward, and the force from the tool can be applied to the obstacle nail reliably, and the obstacle nail can be adjusted accurately. Further, the lower center decorative body 3610 can prevent the gaming panel 600 from being bent, and the force from the tool can be reliably applied to the obstacle nail. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the game panel 600 and to prevent the game panel 600 from being damaged during maintenance or the like. Therefore, the time required for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the inability to use the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance. Can be provided.

  Further, since the gaming panel 600 is a thin transparent plate, a large liquid crystal display device 1400 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent gaming panel 600 to display a powerful effect image on a large screen. The pachinko machine 1 having the unprecedented three-dimensional game board 4 can be made entertaining or by arranging the movable decorative bodies 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500 and the light emitting decorative body 3600. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can be greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines can be reliably realized.

  Furthermore, when a game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 by an operation of the player is received in the start port 2001, 2002 and the winning ports 2004, 2101, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to increase the interest of the player. Can do. In addition, when a game ball is received at the start ports 2001 and 2002, a predetermined lottery result (first special random number or second special random number) is drawn, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player according to the lottery result. Since ("big hit" game) occurs, the opportunity to pay out the game ball increases during the occurrence of the advantageous game state, which can further enhance the interest of the player. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player play a game aiming at the start ports 2001 and 2002 so that a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is drawn, and to enter a game ball driving operation. It is possible to increase the player's expectation based on whether or not a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is drawn, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, the lower center decorative body 3610 is in contact with the position of the rear surface of the game panel 600 corresponding to the attacker unit 2000 having the start ports 2001, 2002 capable of receiving game balls and the general winning port 2004, It is possible to reliably prevent the gaming panel from being bent when adjusting the obstacle nails implanted around the start ports 2001 and 2002, and it takes time to adjust the obstacle nails around the start ports 2001 and 2002. This makes it possible to adjust the obstacle nail sufficiently and accurately, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play, and reducing the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since the center ball 2300 having a stage 2310 that allows the game ball to roll in the left-right direction is provided, the pachinko machine 1 similar to the pachinko machine having the conventional stage can be obtained. It is possible to prevent a player accustomed to the pachinko machine from feeling uncomfortable and deteriorating the interest in the game, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2310, and to have an interest in the game. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, as described above, the contact portion 3610a of the lower central decorative body 3610 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the gaming panel 600 to prevent the gaming panel 600 from being bent rearward. A frame having an attacker unit 2000 having a start opening 2001, 2002 or the like capable of receiving a game ball, an opening 600e for inserting and supporting the side winning port member 2100, and a stage 2310 capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction. By forming the opening portion 600e for inserting and supporting the center-shaped center accessory 2300, the lower center decorative body 3610 ensures that the gaming panel 600 bends to the rear side even if the strength and rigidity of the gaming panel 600 is reduced. Therefore, the obstacle nail can be adjusted accurately and quickly, so that an opening 600e is formed in the game panel 600 to form the attacker unit 2000 or the center. Can comprise over won game 2300, interest in the game to delight more the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower central decorative body 3610 is fixed in the box-shaped back box 621 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rear side of the lower central decorative body 3610 is further supported by the back box 621. The rear surface of the gaming panel 600 can be supported more firmly, and the gaming panel 600 can be prevented from flexing rearward so that the obstacle nail can be adjusted more reliably. Further, since the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided, it is possible to display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the game state, and not only the movement of the game ball but also the effect image to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be entertained and can be easily bored.

  Furthermore, since the lower center decorative body 3610 is used as a decorative body, even if the rear lower central decorative body 3610 can be viewed from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 600, it can be prevented from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to improve the design of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

[5. Display effects in liquid crystal display devices]
A specific example of the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the present embodiment can display different effect images on the upper and lower sides of the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 arranged in a substantially horizontal direction. It is like that.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 173, in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, in the region below the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500, the display is changed in the vertical direction. The three decorative symbols (three decorative symbol rows) ZG1 to ZG3 and the background image appearing behind these decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed in an effect manner. On the other hand, in the area above the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500, the image content different from the background image displayed in the lower area appears. .

  Note that the image contents appearing in the region above the upper left movable ornament 3400 and the upper right movable ornament 3500 are usually static images that hardly change. In the upper region, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are not displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, the control procedure for the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is as follows. That is, now, assuming that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the main control board 4100 first performs determination processing for the big hit based on the special random number already acquired at this time. In this determination process, not only the determination of winning a big hit, but also the number of rounds of the big hit game (2R, 15R) performed when it is determined that the big win is won, and the game state after the end of the big hit game ( A determination is also made as to whether or not a gaming state of “with certainty” with a high jackpot probability is set and changed. However, the determination of winning the big hit is made based on the random number for determination of success / failure among the special random numbers, whereas the determination about the number of rounds and the gaming state is based on the random number for determining symbols of the special random numbers. Done.

  Next, in the main control board 4100, the special symbol based on the result of the determination on the winning of the big hit and the variable time determining random number already acquired (acquired based on the winning at the start opening) at this time. Determine the variation time.

  Then, the main control board 4100 outputs the result information thus determined and determined to the peripheral control board 4140. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the result information thus output from the main control board 4100.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 4140, first of all the result information from the main control board 4100, based on the result information on the winning of the big hit, the effect table dedicated to the big win and the special effect at the time of the big hit losing Select one of the tables. In these effect tables, the contents of the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step-up notice effect described later, eel dog chance effect, lower movable decorative effect effect, background change effect, etc.) Each is stored in a correlated form.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control board 4140, after selecting one of the two effect tables, the result information from the main control board 4100 is selected based on the determination information related to the variation time of the special symbol. One of the contents of the display effect memorize | stored in the effect table is selected (judgment).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4140 outputs information related to the contents of the selected display effect to the liquid crystal control board 4150 as the display command. As a result, the content of the display effect selected based on the result information from the main control board 4100 appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. At this time, information (command) generated in response to selection of the contents of such display effects is appropriately output to the lamp driving board 3011, the motor driving board 3013, the sound source IC 4140c, etc. Various effects linked to the display effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are realized.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol combination (a symbol combination in which all three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 appear as numbers) appears on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a big hit is won. It is suggested.

(Step-up notice effect)
173 and 174 are examples of display images that appear on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when it is determined that a so-called step-up notice effect is performed as the contents of the display effect by the peripheral control board 4140. Here, illustrations of various types of accessories provided around the liquid crystal display device 1400 are omitted.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), when the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen, a predetermined start condition is established and the peripheral control is performed. It is assumed that a step-up notice effect is determined to be performed on the substrate 4140.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4140 first starts the variable display of the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the first character CR1 for step 1 represented as “eel dog” is made to appear while the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are variably displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 173 (c), a second character CR2 for Step 2 that looks like a police officer is newly added while three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed in a variable manner. Let At this time, the first character CR1 for the step 1 is expressed so as to be surprised when the second character CR2 is seen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), the third decoration for step 3 expressed as an ojisan wearing a straw hat with three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 displayed in a variable manner. Character CR3 is newly introduced. At this time, the first character CR1 for step 1 has escaped outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and is not displayed. In addition, the second character CR2 for step 2 is displayed as if fishing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (e), the fourth character CR4 for step 4 represented as a bee-filled ojisan is displayed with the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 displayed in a variable manner. New appearance. At this time, the first character CR1 for step 1 has escaped outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and is not displayed. In addition, the second character CR2 for step 2 is displayed as if fishing. Further, the third character CR3 for step 3 is effect-displayed in a manner that helps fishing of the second character CR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (f), the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed in a variably displayed manner for the step 5 represented as a shark caught by the second character CR2. The fifth character CR5 is newly introduced. At this time, the first character CR1 for step 1 has escaped outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and is not displayed. Also, the second character CR2 for step 2, the third character CR3 for step 3, and the fourth character CR4 for step 4 are surprised or delighted that the fifth character CR5 for step 5 has newly appeared. The effect is displayed as if it were.

  Thus, in the step-up notice effect of the present embodiment, when three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 (a plurality of image symbols) are variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed. Prior to the stop display of all, a plurality of preview effect scenes (FIGS. 173 (b) to (d) and FIG. 174 (e) are displayed so that the display effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be developed step by step. ) And (f)), the five preview effect scenes respectively displayed) can be sequentially displayed.

  However, all of these five notice effect scenes (FIGS. 173 (b) to (d), FIGS. 174 (e) and (f)) are not necessarily displayed depending on the content of the display effect determined by the peripheral control board 4140. I don't mean. For example, among the five characters CR1 to CR5, the step-up effect ends when the first character CR1 for step 1 (FIG. 173 (b)) appears, and then the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed. There is a case where it is stopped and displayed. Similarly, when the second character CR2 for step 2 (FIG. 173 (c)) appears, when the third character CR3 for step 3 (FIG. 173 (d)) appears, When the fourth character CR4 (FIG. 174 (e)) appears, the step-up effect ends, and thereafter, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 may be stopped and displayed.

  That is, in this step-up effect, the more the number of times the notice effect scenes are sequentially displayed, the more special symbol combinations (for example, all three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400). It is suggested that the expectation (reliability) that the combination of symbols appearing in the numbers) appears is high.

  Here, the degree of expectation (reliability) is a specific effect (step-up notice effect, eel dog chance effect, lower movable ornament effect, background change effect, etc.) or a specific display mode (black or white This represents the extent to which a big hit game (special game) can be expected to be awarded when one character CR1) appears. As a degree of expectation with respect to a specific presentation or a specific display mode, for example, when a big hit is won, a ratio of executing a display presentation in which a specific presentation or a specific display mode appears (winning execution ratio), and a big hit It is possible to set by a ratio (execution ratio at the time of losing) of executing a display effect in which a specific effect or a specific display mode appears when no is won (when lost). The higher the value, the higher the degree of expectation, and the smaller the value, the lower the degree of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is displayed (confirmed) by the appearance of the third character CR3, and the reach effect (super reach effect) performed when the background image is changed by the appearance of the fourth character CR4. Is displayed in advance (confirmed). In addition, the appearance of the fifth character CR5 suggests that the expectation that the big hit is won is extremely high.

  However, as described above, in the step-up notice effect in which the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 can be developed and displayed in stages as described above, only the first first character CR1 among the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 is displayed. Sometimes. In this case, for example, it is determined that the reach effect is not performed, and it is suggested that the possibility of being stopped and displayed with a special symbol combination is low, that is, the expected value is low. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may decline due to the step-up notice effect.

  In addition, among the characters CR1 to CR5 that can be developed and displayed step by step in such a step-up notice effect, the first character CR1 that appears first is almost expected to rise even if it appears on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. There is a tendency that the player dislikes the image with a low expectation in the first place, and even if the first character CR1 is displayed, the game interest may be lowered. In addition, even if the plurality of characters CR2 to CR5 are developed and displayed in stages after the first character CR1 appears, there is a concern that the player may not easily realize that the degree of expectation is steadily increasing. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first character CR1 (specific notice effect scene) displayed first among the characters CR1 to CR5 (plural notice effect scenes) that can be developed and displayed stepwise in the step notice effect. When only the character appears on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the appearance level of the first character CR1 can be continuously displayed so as to repeat the appearance scene (specific notice effect scene), thereby displaying the high expectation level in advance. It is possible to perform (specific notice continuous production means).

  That is, in this case, among the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 (a plurality of notice effect scenes), only the appearance scene (specific notice effect scene) of the first character CR1 having the lowest expectation is repeated so as to be repeated. It will be displayed (continuous appearance effect). However, even if such an appearance scene of the first character CR1 is continuously displayed so that this is repeated, the expectation degree that was originally low is also increased steadily by the accumulation of the expectation degree. Can be recognized. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect has a certain degree of expectation only by looking at such repeated continuous display.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when only the appearance scene of the first character CR1 having a low expectation appears. In addition, the player seems to be disgusted with the appearance scene of the first character CR1 by looking at the situation where the first character CR1 having low expectation is trying to increase the expectation. This makes it possible to avoid this, and it is also possible to suppress the decrease in the gaming interest when the first character CR1 is displayed.

(Consecutive eel dog chance production (continuous appearance production))
FIG. 175 is an example of a display image that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when it is determined that the continuous appearance effect of the first character CR1 is performed as the content of the display effect by the peripheral control board 4140. In this case as well, illustrations of various types of accessories provided around the liquid crystal display device 1400 are omitted.

  That is, now, when the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen, a predetermined start condition is established, and a continuous display effect is performed on the peripheral control board 4140. Is determined.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4140 first starts the variable display of the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the first character CR1 for step 1 represented as “eel dog” is made to appear while the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are variably displayed. Accordingly, the player can recognize that a step-up notice effect has been started in which a plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 can be developed and displayed in stages.

  However, here, the second character CR2 for step 2 is not newly introduced, and the first character CR1 that has appeared is operated to escape from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), after the player recognizes that only the first first character CR1 of the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 is displayed and the step-up notice effect has ended. In addition, the first character CR1 is displayed in a large size, and an effect suggesting that “continuous eel dog chance (continuous appearance effect)” is performed is performed.

  Then, on the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 175 (b), the appearance scene of the first character CR1a for the first time is produced and displayed. At this time, a continuous notice display area HR is displayed in which the appearance scene of the first character CR1 is displayed continuously for a maximum of five times. In this continuous notice display area HR, five display images are displayed so as to be arranged, and each time the first character CR1 appears in the “continuous eel dog chance (continuous appearance effect)”, of the five display images. The display mode changes in order from the display image on the right end. This makes it possible to recognize the maximum number of appearance scenes remaining and how many appearance scenes have been performed so far.

  In the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 175 (c), the same display screen before the first character CR1a appearing in the first appearance scene escapes from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The appearance scene of the second first character CR1b is produced and displayed within a short period of time that is still displayed. As described above, the appearance level of the first character CR1a is continuously displayed within a short period of time so that the display is duplicated even though they are the same character, so that the originally low expectations are accumulated. It is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation is steadily increasing. At this time, in the continuous notice display area HR, the display mode of the two right display images among the five display images is changed and displayed.

  The continuous display of the appearance scene of the first character CR1a is as follows. As shown in FIG. 175 (d), the first character CR1d appearing in the fourth appearance scene is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When it is still displayed on the screen, the process is repeated until the fifth appearance scene of the first character CR1e is effect-displayed. As a result, when the appearance scene of the first character CR1e for the fifth time is displayed, as shown in FIG. 175 (e), the left decorative symbol ZG1 and the right decorative symbol ZG1 among the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed. It is determined that the decorative symbol ZG2 is displayed so as to be stopped so as to form a reach state.

  In such a continuous display effect, the first character for step 1 is within a short period from the start of the variable display of the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 to the stop (temporary stop in the case of pseudo-continuous). The appearance scene of CR1 is repeated and displayed continuously. More precisely, the appearance scenes of the first character CR1 are continuously displayed within a short period in which the same character is displayed repeatedly, and this indicates that the expected degree is accumulated in the display on the display screen. To appear. And the high expectation degree that the special symbol combination appears is displayed in advance by the effect mode that appears when continuously displayed.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a notice is displayed that the higher the number of times that the appearance scene of the first character CR1 is continuously displayed, the higher the degree of expectation. Furthermore, in the continuous effect display regarding the appearance action of the first character CR1, the display mode with a low expectation level can be changed to a display mode with a high level of expectations each time the display is continuously performed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the first character CR1 is originally a character with a black color scheme. However, in this continuous display effect, a color scheme having a different expectation from black each time the first character CR1 appears. (Red, white, and gold) are added so that they can appear. Therefore, in this continuous display effect, the first character CR1 does not appear so insignificantly, and each time it appears, the player has a chance to increase the degree of expectation according to the display mode of the first character CR1. It will be performed as an extremely interesting production that is continuously given inside. Note that red has a higher degree of expectation than black, white has a higher degree of expectation than red, and gold is a big hit.

  The degree of expectation is different in terms of how many times the change in the display mode appears in the appearance scene of the first character CR1. For example, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation as the first character CR1 with a color scheme having a high degree of expectation appears earlier. In addition, although only the first character CR1 with the lowest expected color scheme appears up to four times, if the first character CR1 with the golden color scheme appears in the fifth time, the player will see it. A reversal effect can be realized.

  In this embodiment, depending on the display mode that appears in the continuous display effect, such as when the first character CR1 with a white color scheme appears from the first time, the step-up notice effect is notified. It is possible to give a notice that the special symbol combination appears with a higher expectation than the highest expectation displayed (when the fifth character CR5 for step 5 newly appears). I have to. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately improve the image of the expectation when only the appearance scene of the first character CR1 having a low expectation appears.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when executing the continuous appearance effect, the player recognizes that the step-up notice effect has ended without displaying only the first first character CR1 of the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5. I waited for a predetermined time. As a result, a certain degree of expectation is maintained regardless of the stage at which the step-up notice effect ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the first character CR1 that appeared last time is still displayed on the display screen, the above-mentioned continuous appearance effect is performed in the form of newly appearing the first character CR1 next time. . That is, in this case, a plurality of specific first characters CR1 can be displayed on the same screen, and the speed when the appearance scenes are continuously displayed can be increased. The presence of the character CR1 can be emphasized.

  In addition, when the first character CR1 appears continuously in this way, effects other than the display effects such as the effect sound and the frame lamp at that time are continuously executed in a manner in which the effects in the same manner are repeated. It is desirable to output as appropriate to the lamp driving board 3011, the motor driving board 3013, the sound source IC 4140c, and the like. Thus, the player's attention can be attracted by a humorous presentation in which the movements of all the production elements are repeated within a short period of time.

  Further, an effect mode in which the expected degree of the continuous appearance effect is suggested (the effect mode that appears when continuously displayed is not limited to the display mode in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the output mode and frame of the effect sound The degree of expectation may be expressed by the lighting mode of the lamp, etc. For example, each time the first character CR1 appears, the output mode of the production sound is changed, or the output mode of the frame lamp is changed. The degree of expectation may be expressed.

  As for the continuous appearance effect, only one first character CR1 is displayed, and this appearance scene is continuously displayed so that the appearance scene is repeated by the reverse reproduction scene and the forward reproduction scene of the displayed first character CR1. You may make it do. In other words, in this case, it is possible to play a game under the image of the pachinko machine 1 itself corrected and displayed by a white eel that has been displayed incorrectly (black eel). The decrease in the amount is suppressed. At this time, it is desirable that effects other than the display effects such as effect sounds, frame lamps, and the like cooperate with the effects in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by reversing and forward feeding.

  Further, in the continuous appearance effect of the present embodiment, every time the first character CR1 appears, an effect is given so that the appearing first character CR1 escapes outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Only a maximum of two first characters CR1 are displayed. However, every time the first character CR1 appears, the first character CR1 that has appeared is kept on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and when all the first characters CR1 appear, the first characters CR1 that have appeared. It is more desirable to perform an effect in which one character CR1 moves as a group and moves outside the display screen. That is, in this case, the more the first character CR1 moves as a group and moves outside the display screen, the easier it is to recognize that the degree of expectation is higher. It will be possible to produce with more interest as to whether or not it will only be repeated. Also, in this case, it is positioned as a pre-production for performing group notice, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation in the group notice in stages, and so on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when performing the continuous appearance effect, only the first first character CR1 of the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 is displayed and the player is made to recognize that the step-up notice effect has ended. It was decided to make a correct display. However, the second first character CR1 may be displayed continuously immediately after the first character CR1 used in the step-up notice effect is displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the step-up notice effect can be developed step by step (a situation where the first character CR2 can appear), the continuous appearance effect is suddenly performed. It becomes possible to perform a continuous appearance effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first character CR1 among the plurality of characters CR1 to CR5 appearing in the step-up notice effect is used, and the appearance scene (appearance action) of the first character CR1 is repeated. Is to be displayed continuously. However, in an appropriate expectation effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special symbol combination will appear, an expectation of display modes that can be displayed in the effect (for example, an action mode to attack (punch, kick, long-distance attack)) There is a case where a specific image having a low display mode (for example, punch) appears. At this time, the effect display may be continuously performed so that a specific operation (punch attack) by a specific image having a display mode (for example, punch) with low expectation is repeated.

  Even if a specific action with such a low degree of expectation is displayed continuously so that this is repeated, the expectation degree that was originally low is also steadily rising due to the accumulation of that expectation. The player can be recognized. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect has a certain degree of expectation only by looking at such repeated continuous display. In addition, when the display mode with low expectation is repeated, the display mode (punch attack seen from the upper viewpoint, punch attack seen from the previous viewpoint, without changing the type of the specific action (punch attack), It is more desirable to give an opportunity to increase the expectation level by changing only the punch attack (viewed from the lower viewpoint) whenever the images are continuously displayed.

(Lower movable decoration production)
Here, the lower movable decorative body effect is an effect using the lower movable decorative body 3300. That is, as described above, the lower movable decorative body 3300 is originally projected on the projection surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 before all the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are stopped and displayed. It is prepared to move from outside the plane and to perform a predetermined moving effect by the lower movable decorative body 3300 within the projection plane (see FIGS. 153, 154, etc.). That is, in this case, by performing a predetermined effect at the time of movement, it can be displayed in advance that the degree of expectation that a special symbol combination appears on the display screen is high.

  However, in such a pachinko machine in which a large accessory (lower movable decorative body 3300) is prepared, it is difficult to use this for the production when a predetermined moving effect is not performed by the lower movable decorative body 3300. The movable decorative body 3300 may become an obstacle, for example, the space as the region 605 is compressed.

  In particular, the effect by the large lower movable decorative body 3300 has a strong impact on the player, and is often adopted as a highly expected effect. For this reason, the large lower movable decorative body 3300 is often in a stationary state without being operated, and the disadvantages in the stationary state cannot be ignored.

  In addition, in response to these problems, it is suggested that even if the production by the movable body is not actually performed, the production by the movable body may be performed only by fine movement or vibration, and this is not done. There are also known those intended to eliminate the disadvantages of the state. However, in this case, it is important as a movable body effect that something that has not been seen until now, or something that has not been directed at all, suddenly moves and performs with a surprise impression to the player The part will be lost.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the gaming panel 600 as a plate-like portion having permeability as described above, and is driven into the gaming area 605 along the gaming panel 600. The game balls that have been thrown down. When the predetermined moving effect is not performed by the lower movable decorative body 3300, the lower movable decorative body 3300 is accommodated in the space behind the display panel and outside the projection surface of the display screen. Like that. For this reason, when the effect at the time of movement by the lower movable ornament 3300 is not performed, the space as the game area 605 is preferably avoided.

  In addition, while the lower movable decorative body 3300 is accommodated in the back space of the game panel 600 in this way, a predetermined storage effect using the accommodated lower movable decorative body 3300 is a flow path of the game ball. It becomes possible to make it visible to the player through the gaming panel 600 having the above-described transparency. Therefore, even when the movement effect by the lower movable decoration body 3300 is not performed, it can be used for the effect, and this also applies to the entertainment entertainment when the movement effect by the lower movable decoration body 3300 is not performed. It can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, the predetermined accommodation effect by the lower movable decorative body 3300 can be executed through the gaming panel 600 having the above-described permeability as a flow path of the game ball, so that the player confirms the flow situation of the game ball. Even when a highly anticipated effect is performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect on the display screen is achieved by the effect during the accommodation performed on the flow path of the game ball. Since attention is promoted, it is possible to suppress the possibility of missing this.

  176 and 177 show the liquid crystal display when it is determined that an effect using the lower movable decorative body 3300 (in this embodiment, a pseudo-variable effect) is performed as the content of the display effect by the peripheral control board 4140. 4 is an example of a display image that appears on the device 1400. FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), when the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen, a predetermined start condition is established and the peripheral control is performed. It is assumed that it is determined that the pseudo variation effect is performed on the substrate 4140.

  Then, on the peripheral control board 4140, first, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the variable display of the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), display is performed in a temporarily stopped state (stop display effect) as if the variable display of the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 has been completed. In this stop display effect, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are actually displayed in a slightly varying manner.

  Then, on the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), the center frame movable decorative body 2350 disposed on the left outer side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed on the display screen. Operate to get inside. Then, an effect as if the liquid crystal display device 1400 responded to such an operation by the center frame movable decorative body 2350 is performed by the display effect in the display screen. Further, at this time, by performing a light emission effect (effect during housing) by the lower movable decorative body 3300 through the transparent plate-like game panel 600, the light emission effect on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 spreads outside the display screen. We are trying to achieve a production like this.

  Then, after such a collaborative effect is performed between the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the lower movable decorative body 3300, the peripheral control board 4140 then displays the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 as shown in FIG. 176 (e). By executing the fluctuation display in the form of releasing the temporary stop state of the first, a pseudo fluctuation effect (first pseudo fluctuation) is made to make it appear as if the second fluctuation display was performed without being suspended. .

  Such a pseudo-variation effect suggests that the degree of expectation increases each time the pseudo-variation realized between the temporary stop state and the cancellation thereof is repeated. It is assumed that the reach effect is performed with pseudo fluctuations. However, regarding the light emission effect (effect during housing) by the lower movable decorative body 3300, when the first pseudo variation is started, when the second pseudo variation is started, and when the third pseudo variation is started. When it is performed (depending on the number of pseudo fluctuations), it is more desirable to suggest the expected degree of appearance of the special symbol combination by making the emission color different. However, it is desirable that the probability that a special symbol combination appears on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the accommodation effect is performed is a probability of less than “50%”.

  Then, in the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 177 (f), among the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, the left decorative symbol ZG1 and the right decorative symbol ZG2 form a reach state. To stop display. Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (g), the reach effect (super reach effect) performed when the background image is changed is displayed. In this super reach production, a display is performed in which two male characters go to catch the symbol “4” necessary for the special symbol combination to appear.

  Then, on the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. 177 (h), two male characters fail to catch the symbol “4”, suggesting that the jackpot is not won. Is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol combination that suggests that the jackpot is not won is displayed, the peripheral control board 4140 moves the lower movable decorative body 3300 from the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. At the moved position, as shown in FIG. 177 (i), a predetermined moving effect (light emission effect) is performed in cooperation with the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Note that this moving effect has a higher degree of expectation than the accommodation effect when the lower movable decorative body 3300 is accommodated in the space behind the game panel 600. More specifically, a special symbol combination is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as shown in FIG. 177 (j) with a probability exceeding, for example, “50%” when this moving effect appears. It has come to appear. However, when such a moving effect appears, it is determined that a special symbol combination appears on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so that the lower movable decorative body 3300 is exposed. It is more desirable for distinguishing from the production at the time of storage performed without being performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the predetermined moving effect by the lower movable ornament 3300 performed within the projection plane of the display screen is outside the projection plane of the display screen and has transparency. The degree of expectation that a special symbol combination appears is higher than a predetermined production effect by the lower movable decorative body 3300 performed in the space behind the game panel 600. That is, the lower movable decorative body 3300 prepared for realizing such a high-expectation moving effect is also used in a storage effect with a low expectation, so that the lower movable decorative body 3300 is used. The execution frequency of the production can be improved. In addition, when a high-expectation moving effect is not performed, a space (in the past, a dead space) in which the lower movable decorative body 3300 is accommodated can be used as a space for the effect. This makes it easy to produce an effect using the entire panel.

  However, in the case where the effects having different degrees of expectation are performed using the same lower movable decorative body 3300, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the degree of expectation when the effects by the lower movable decorative body 3300 are performed. . In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the production on the side with low expectation, the production at the time of accommodation by the lower movable decoration body 3300 is performed through the game panel 600 having permeability between the player and the lower movable decoration body 3300. I am doing so. That is, in this case, even if the player performs an effect using the same lower movable decorative body 3300, the lower movable decorative body 3300 viewed through the game panel 600 and the lower movable decorative body 3300 directly viewed without passing through the game panel 600 are used. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that it is difficult for the player to grasp the degree of expectation when the effect by the lower movable decorative body 3300 is performed. . In this sense, the lower movable decorative body 3300 is made of a material that can make the form of the lower movable decorative body 3300 different when viewed through the game panel 600, such as a material having transparency of less than 100% or a colored material. It is desirable to be configured.

  More preferably, as for the gaming panel 600, unless the lower movable decorative body 3300 accommodated in the space behind the gaming panel 600 emits light due to the effect at the time of accommodation, the transmission is low enough to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence. It is desirable that the material has property and color. That is, in this case, even if the lower movable decorative body 3300 is accommodated on the back side of the flow path of the game ball that is easy for the player to watch, the lower movable decoration body 3300 is conscious when it is in a normal state in which the effect during accommodation is not performed. It becomes possible to play without playing. In addition, when the performance at the time of accommodation is performed, the performance by the lower movable decorative body 3300, which was not conscious of before, is performed, so that the player has a sense of expectation for a big hit based on a surprise impression Will be able to.

  In addition, it is desirable that the production effect at the time of accommodation is performed as an effect in which the light emitting unit provided in the lower movable decorative body 3300 emits light in such a manner that the outer shape of the lower movable decorative body 3300 does not appear. Accordingly, the appearance of the outer shape of the lower movable decorative body 3300 is prevented from being exposed due to the production at the time of accommodation, and when the above-mentioned production at the time of movement having higher expectation than the production at the time of accommodation is performed. This makes it possible to maintain the feeling of expectation. In addition, even when a moving effect is performed after that, it seems that the effect uses another member, so that it is more preferable to avoid adversely affecting the expectation of the moving effect. Will come to be. In other words, while making it possible to carry out appropriate productions even at the time of containment, things that have not been seen until now, or those that have not been produced at all, suddenly start moving with a surprise impression to the player It is possible to secure an important part as a movable body effect such as performing an effect. In this case, the light emitting unit provided in the lower movable decorative body 3300 emits light in a light emission mode (luminance or light emission pattern) such that the outer shape of the lower movable decorative body 3300 does not appear, or the outer shape of the lower movable decorative body 3300 is previously set. Will be provided in such an arrangement that does not appear.

  In addition, about the production | presentation at the time of accommodation by the lower movable decoration body 3300, and this at the time of a movement, this was implement | achieved as a light emission production, respectively. However, this light emitting effect does not have to be that the lower movable decorative body 3300 itself emits light, and the lower movable decorative body 3300 appears to shine by light emission from other members (the liquid crystal display device 1400). It may be.

(Background change production)
Here, the background change effect is an effect in which the background image is changed by the effect display on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In other words, the background image displayed behind the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 needs to be displayed constantly, so that when switching the background image, this can be completed in a short time. There were many. In addition, some players do not pay much attention to the background image, but only pay attention to the production image (such as a character displayed in front of the background image), and in this case, the background image is switched. It is difficult to recognize the image relationship between after and before switching.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), as a background image, the upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 are arranged as a boundary. The front background MH and the back background UH having different image contents at the top and bottom can be displayed on the display screen, and the front background MH is preferentially displayed on the display screen over the back background UH. (Two background display control means). For this reason, even if the front background MH is displayed as the background image displayed behind the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, the function of the front background MH as the background image is lost. For example, the front background MH can be reduced and displayed (background function loss means).

  In the peripheral control board 4140d, when it is determined that the background change effect is performed when the front background MH is displayed as the background image displayed behind the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, In changing the image content of the foreground / background MH after variably displaying the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the upper left movable ornament 3400 and the upper right movable ornament 3500 are The liquid crystal display device 1400 is moved outside the display screen. As a result, the front background MH and the back background UH appear to touch each other.

  Then, on the peripheral control board 4140d, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the front background MH is reduced and displayed until the area where the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 fluctuate does not fit in the front background MH. To do. As described above, the foreground / background display area in which the effect of the foreground MH is displayed is smaller than the pattern display area in which the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are effect-displayed, thereby providing a background image of the foreground MH. The function of will be lost. It should be noted that the three dotted arrows in FIG. 178 conceptually show the regions where the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 vary.

  In this case, in the peripheral control board 4140d, the back background UH is displayed on the display screen while the function of the background image is lost. The effect is displayed as a background image for ZG3 (back background display control means). That is, with respect to the front background MH, among the images displayed in front of the back background UH (background image) by losing the function as the background image, an effect image (character or the like) different from the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 Are also displayed once. After that, in order to function again as a background image for the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, the background image can be switched by changing the image content of the front background MH to another image content. Change effect was performed (front / background change control means).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 178 (d), (e), and 179 (f), in the peripheral control board 4140d, first, the foreground / background MH is first moved to the left as it is, and the display screen is displayed. The production is excluded from However, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 178 (e) and 179 (f), a foreground / background MH of another image content newly appears from the right side of the display screen and moved to the left. In addition, an effect such as guidance in the display screen is also performed. In this case, the background image HG having two different image contents appears at the same time, so that it can be recognized that the background image HG is replaced.

  On the other hand, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are not affected by the movement of the foreground / background MH, but are not displayed in the display area of the foreground / background MH, and the variable display is continued beyond this. In other words, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 have a constant display mode (size, etc.) regardless of the movement of the foreground / background MH, and the back background UH as a background image is behind them. In the displayed state, the change display is continued indifferently.

  As a result, when the foreground / background MH of another newly appearing image content is stopped at the center of the display screen, the peripheral control board 4140d, as shown in FIGS. 179 (g) to (i), The upper left movable decorative body 3400 and the upper right movable decorative body 3500 are operated, and these are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction in front of the display screen. In addition, the front background MH is enlarged and displayed until the area where the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 fluctuate is within the front background MH. Thus, the foreground / background display area in which the effect of the foreground / background MH is displayed is larger than the pattern display area in which the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are effected and displayed, so that the background image of the foreground MH This function is activated again, whereby the background image of the foreground / background MH is changed by the effect.

  That is, in this case, when changing the background image of the foreground MH, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are displayed statically as the background image while there are variably displayed over a plurality of games (the display position does not move). The foreground MH that has been displayed is suddenly switched to appear as an effect image displayed in front of the background image (FIGS. 178 (c) to (e), FIGS. 179 (f) and (g). )). For this reason, a wider display effect beyond the role as the background image is realized, and as a result, the background image itself can be displayed with a rendering element.

  In addition, some players do not pay much attention to the background image, and some players pay attention only to the effect image (character displayed in front of the background image). However, in the present embodiment, when performing a background change effect in which the image content of the front background MH is switched, the front background MH is first set as an effect image displayed in front of the rear background UH (background image). Gaze by players has been collected by switching. Then, by changing the image content of the foreground MH to another image content and making it function as a background image again, a background change in which the foreground MH (background image) is switched is effected by the effect image. Therefore, the image relationship before and after the background image is switched can be watched by the effect.

  In the present embodiment, a character (a character dressed as a police officer) as an effect image displayed in front of the back background UH is displayed in association with the front background MH. The character performs an effect of moving the foreground / background MH displayed in a reduced size. When a new foreground MH appears, another character (infant character) is displayed in association with the new foreground MH, and this other character moves the new foreground MH. The production to make it do.

  That is, in this case, if the expectation is made different depending on the character without changing the expectation separately for the image contents of the foreground / background MH, the expectation differs between before and after the background change effect is performed. It is possible to squeeze. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the foreground background MH brought by the infant character is enlarged and displayed as a background image for the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, with a predetermined high probability. The grand prize opening 2003 is opened only for two rounds.

  Therefore, in the background change effect of the present embodiment, the background image can be changed in a considerable amount of time by changing the foreground MH to the foreground MH of another image content by the effect. It becomes. Therefore, the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 can be stopped and displayed immediately after the foreground / background MH is changed. Then, the changed background MH is the image content associated with the infant character, and when the big winning opening 2003 is opened for only two rounds, whether the short open big hit is won or the specific condition is met Either. Therefore, even if the effect is such that the background is changed in this way, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Note that, when the changed foreground / background MH is the image content associated with the infant character, it may be determined that the two rounds will be released.

  In this embodiment, regarding the loss of function as the background image of the foreground MH (displaying the foreground MH so as not to fit the ornamental symbols ZG1 to ZG3), the three ornamental symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are variably displayed. In a state where the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 are difficult to visually recognize. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable with the loss of the function of the foreground / background MH as the background image.

  In this embodiment, not only the image content of the front background MH is changed, but also the image content of the back background UH is changed as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 179 (i). I have to. This makes it easier to recognize the degree of expectation when the image content of the foreground / background MH is changed.

  However, although the background change effect is performed and the effect of moving the front background MH as an effect image is performed, the image content may not change before and after the background change effect. Good. At this time, it is more desirable to change only the image content of the back background UH so that the special winning opening 2003 is opened only for two rounds. That is, in this case, even if the change of the image content of the front background MH fails in the background change effect, if the change of the image content of the back background UH is successful, the game is controlled to a special game state with a win of 2 rounds. Can be done.

  In the present embodiment, the foreground / background MH displayed on the display screen is changed while the function as the background image is lost. At that time, the adoption candidates as two or more foreground / background MHs having different image contents are displayed (FIG. 178 (e)). Note that it is more desirable that the foreground / background MH having different image contents have different expectations.

  In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation is also determined by the back background UH (more precisely, an infant character as an effect image that appears in front of the back background UH) during the period in which the back background UH is displayed as a background image. As a result of the background change effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, it is more preferable that an image suggesting the degree of expectation can be displayed in a predetermined portion that is hidden by the front background MH and hidden during the period in which the background change effect is not performed in the back background UH. . In other words, in this case, when the background change effect is performed, the foreground background MH changes so as to expose the predetermined portion, thereby improving the game entertainment at a portion different from the change of the background. Can be planned.

  For example, the hidden background portion of the rear background UH is exposed by moving the reduced-displayed front background MH itself so as to exclude it from the display screen. Thereby, the player can recognize the degree of expectation hidden by the foreground / background MH. At the same time, the foreground / background MH itself of another image content is moved so as to enter the display screen (hide a predetermined portion). The front background MH that has entered in this way may be simply passed through the display screen (predetermined portions are hidden for a predetermined time and exposed again). It appears and moves to enter the display screen. Finally, the foreground MH that has entered the display screen and stopped moving is enlarged and displayed as a background image. In the case where an appropriate front background MH is passed, it is possible to produce and display the back background UH so that the expectation level suggested in the predetermined part may change before and after the passage. It is more desirable to suppress the decrease of

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rear background UH is always displayed larger than the front background MH, and is visible even after the front background MH becomes a background image. When the front background MH is a background image, the area of the front background MH and the back background UH is partitioned by the upper left movable ornament 3400 and the upper right movable ornament 3500. The partitioning objects (upper left movable decorative body 3400 and upper right movable decorative body 3500) operate so as to release the partition when the front background MH loses the background function, whereby the rear background UH becomes the front background MH. It is possible to display the entire display screen as a background image. In this way, the rear background UH is displayed so as to capture the front background MH, so that the rear background UH functions as a background image while the front background MH is visible.

  In this embodiment, the rear background UH is displayed in a large size in advance, and when the front background MH is displayed in a reduced size, the partitioning material with the rear background UH is excluded, and the rear background UH is displayed. Since the front background MH is captured, the front background MH can be displayed as a considerably reduced effect image even if it is slightly reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the foreground MH, which is the background image for the three decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3, is unbalanced as a background image with respect to the region where the decorative symbols ZG1 to ZG3 vary. Since the image content of the foreground / background MH is changed after being reduced to a certain extent, it is easy to recognize how all the background images are exchanged as they are.

  In this embodiment, when the first long-opening jackpot is won, the time-shortening function is activated and the short-time gaming state is performed for 100 symbol variation periods after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed. In this case, in the short game state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a background image (such as yellow) different from that in the normal game state (blue background image), so that the player It is possible to recognize that it has been controlled.

  In addition, when the second long open jackpot is won, the short-time function and the probability changing function are activated and controlled to a special game state for a predetermined period after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, In this special gaming state, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can recognize that the player has been controlled to the short-time gaming state by displaying a background image (such as red) different from that in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state. Like that.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the short open jackpot is won or the specific condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, whether the probability changing function is activated by entering the common effect mode A It is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not.

[6. On-hold display mode in liquid crystal display device]
Here, the hold display mode in the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the hold of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area (a), and (b) the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect which is. FIG. 181 is another diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated in the hold display area, and FIG. 181 is the start memory of the second special symbol in the hold display area. It is another figure for demonstrating the aspect which accumulates. FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in the hold display area.

  As shown in FIG. 173, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided with a holding display area 1401 in which the number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The hold display area 1401 has a plurality of hold storage display sections arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and as shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, from the left to the right in the hold display area 1401. The first hold storage display unit 1401a, the second hold storage display unit 1401b, the third hold storage display unit 1401c, the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d, the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e, the sixth It is composed of a total of eight on-hold storage display units, a on-hold storage display unit 1401f, a seventh on-hold storage display unit 1401g, and an eighth on-hold storage display unit 1401h.

  Each of the storage storage display units 1401a to 1401h in the hold display area 1401 is an area in which a lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 4900 or a lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 4910 can be displayed one by one. is there. The hold display area 1401 displays the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 in a manner in which the number can be easily grasped visually. Therefore, by referring to the hold display area 1401, the player can confirm the current total number of hold of special symbols (total number of start memories).

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) for holding by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 and the upper limit value (second predetermined number) for holding by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 are both “four”. (After the suspended digestion, “three”). Therefore, the hold display area 1401 also has eight hold storage display sections 1401a to 1401h in order to display the maximum holdable number (here, eight) including the special symbol hold counters 4903 and 4913. Yes.

  In addition, each of the storage storage display units 1401a to 1401h is regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the lottery result in the area where the decorative symbol ZG is displayed is derived according to this arrangement order. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1401a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the area where the decorative symbol ZG is displayed.

  Each hold storage display unit 1401a to 1401h is held by a first special symbol hold image 1411 and a second special symbol hold counter 4913, which are display modes indicating that the hold is held by the first special symbol hold counter 4903. Any one of the second special figure hold image 1422, the first special symbol hold counter 4903, and the second special symbol hold counter 4913, which is a non-display form indicating that it is not held. Displayed in a manner.

  In the present embodiment, an image simulating a cocoon (in this embodiment, a red cocoon) is displayed as the second special figure holding image 1422 (see FIG. 180 (b)). On the other hand, as the first special figure reservation image 1411, an image simulating a color moth (white moth in the present embodiment) of a color different from that of the second special figure reservation image 1422 is displayed (FIG. 180 (a)). reference). In this way, the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 are different from each other. Can be clearly distinguished. Furthermore, as described above, the start memory of the second special symbol is digested before the start memory of the first special symbol as described above. In other words, the start memory of the first special symbol is digested later than the start memory of the second special symbol, and is difficult to digest particularly in a state where the time-saving function is activated. Therefore, the image of the kite shown as the second special figure hold image 1422 having a high expected value in the jackpot game given according to the result of the determination of success / failure is hotter than the image of the kite shown as the first special figure hold image 1411 It is made red to make the image.

  The display mode in the hold display area 1401 will be described. For example, in FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b), all the hold storage display units 1401a to 1401h are not displayed, and the first special symbol hold counter 4903 and It is shown that the number of holdings in the second special symbol holding counter 4913 is zero. In addition, the background image is displayed as it is on the display portions of the on-hold storage display portions 1401a to 1401h that are in the non-display mode, and the portion where the start-up storage on-hold display is added is displayed with a bold line.

  When the first special symbol hold counter 490 and the second special symbol hold counter 4913 hold zero, the game ball is won at the first start port 2001 and held by the first special symbol hold counter 4903. (Specifically, when the command receiving means 4950 receives from the main control board 4100 a command for specifying “having won the first starting port 2001”), the first leftmost position of the hold display area 1401 Display control of the reserved storage display unit 1401a of the first special figure hold image 1411 from the non-display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball continuously wins at the first start port 2001 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 4903, the second hold storage display unit 1401b, the third hold storage display unit in the hold display area 1401 1401c and the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d are sequentially displayed on the first special figure hold image 1411 from the non-display mode.

  Thus, the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and displayed so that it is sequentially added to the end (right side in the figure) in the hold display area 1401. Then, when the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 4903 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the first special symbol in the hold display area 1401 The first special figure holding image 1411 is displayed adjacent to N (up to four) in a row.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), in the state where all the hold display areas 1401 (hold storage display sections 1401a to 1401h) are in the non-display state as described above, a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 2002. When it is held by the second special symbol holding counter 4913 (specifically, when the command receiving means 4950 receives a command from the main control board 4100 for specifying “winning at the second starting port 2002”). ), The first hold storage display unit 1401a located at the leftmost end of the hold display area 1401 is controlled to be displayed on the second special figure hold image 1422 from the non-display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 4903 is “1”.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the second start port 2002 and is held by the second special symbol hold counter 4913, the second special figure hold image 1422 shown in the first hold storage display unit 1401a in the hold display area 1401. Is shifted and displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b (that is, backward). Then, a new second special figure hold image 1422 is added to the first hold storage display unit 1401a instead of the second special figure hold image 1422 that is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b. Is displayed.

  Here, “backward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the next hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference. It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, the second special figure hold image 1422 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a is moved to the second hold storage display unit 1401b so that the second hold The second special figure hold image 1422 is displayed on the storage display unit 1401b.

  Further, when a game ball wins the second start opening 2002 with the start memory of the second special symbol being “2”, it is displayed on each of the first hold memory display unit 1401a and the second hold memory display unit 1401b. The second special figure hold image 1422 is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b and the third hold storage display unit 1401c, respectively, and a new second special figure hold is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a. An image 1422 is displayed to be added. Similarly, when a game ball wins the second starting port 2002 with the second special symbol holding ball being “3”, the first holding memory display unit 1401a, the second holding memory display unit 1401b, and the third The second special figure hold image 1422 displayed on the hold storage display unit 1401c is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b, the third hold storage display unit 1401c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d, respectively. In addition, a new second special figure hold image 1422 is displayed to be added to the first hold storage display unit 1401a.

  Thus, the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be sequentially added to the head (left side in the figure) in the hold display area 1401. And when the number of reservations by the second special symbol reservation counter 913 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the second special symbol in the hold display area 1401 The second special figure reservation image 1422 is displayed adjacent to N (up to four) in a row.

  By the way, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held in the hold display area 1401, the hold mode of the start memory of the first special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the start memory of the second special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display unit 1401a to the fourth special memory display unit 1401d have the second special memory). It is assumed that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 2001 in a state where the figure holding image 1422 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (first special figure hold image 1411) of the first special symbol is accumulated in order from the next hold storage display section (here, the fifth hold storage display section 1401d) in the non-display state. Is displayed. In this case as well, as described above, the fifth reserved memory is added in such a manner that it is sequentially added to the end (right side in the figure) in the reserved display area 1401 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 2001. The first special figure hold image 1411 is accumulated and displayed in the order of the display unit 1401e to the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h.

  When the start memory of the first special symbol is held in the hold display area 1401, the start mode of the start memory of the second special symbol is as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), the start memory of the first special symbol is “4” reserved (the first special memory display unit 1401a to the fourth special memory display unit 1401d have the first special memory). It is assumed that a game ball has won a prize at the second start port 2002 in a state where the figure holding image 1411 is displayed. At this time, the start memory (second special figure hold image 1422) of the second special symbol is additionally displayed sequentially on the first hold storage display section (here, the first hold storage display section 1401a) in the hold display area 1401. The In this case as well, in the same manner as described above, the second special figure holding image is added in the form of being sequentially added to the head (left side in the figure) in the holding display area 1401 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002. As 1422 is accumulated and displayed, the display mode of the previous on-hold storage display unit is sequentially shifted backward on the other on-hold storage display units. Specifically, when the start memory of the second special symbol is held “4” in the state shown in FIG. 181 (b), each of the first hold memory display unit 1401a to the seventh hold memory display unit 1401h The display mode is shifted and displayed backward on each of the second hold storage display unit 1401b to the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h, and a second special figure hold image 1422 is newly added to the first hold storage display unit 1401a. Added.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the hold display area 1401, the start memory of the first special symbol is sequentially added to the end of the hold display area 1401 (to the right in the figure), while the start memory of the second special symbol is held. The display area 1401 is added sequentially from the top (downward in the figure). Therefore, in a state where the first special figure reservation image 1411 and the second special figure reservation image 1422 are displayed in the hold display area 1401, the second special figure reservation image 1422 is always before the first special figure reservation image 1411. Displayed on the hold storage display section.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as will be described below, the lottery result is derived (so-called digested) in the start memory of the second special symbol before the start memory of the first special symbol. Therefore, when both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol exist by the display control of the hold display area 1401 as described above, the start memory of the second special symbol is more first. The player can clearly grasp that the special symbol is digested before the start memory.

  However, when the second special symbol start memory exists and the second start opening 2002 is won, the second start memory retained after the second special symbol start memory is retained. It seems to be digested first, but this is only for display, and internally, the second starting memory that is reserved earlier than the starting memory of the second special symbol that is reserved later Digested first.

  Next, the digestion mode of the start memory of each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 82, a portion where the pending display of the start memory is deleted (digested) is displayed with a bold line. That is, as is apparent from FIG. 182, in this embodiment, the start memory corresponding to the display mode of the first reserved storage display unit (first reserved storage display unit 1401a) of the reserved display area 1401 is deleted (digested). Disappeared (pending digestion status expression means)

  As shown in FIG. 182, for example, when there are “four” start memories of the first special symbol and “four” start memories of the second special symbol, the first hold memory display in the hold display area 1401 The second special figure hold image 1422 is displayed on the parts 1401a to 1401d, and the first special figure hold image 1411 is displayed on the fifth hold storage display part 1401e to the fourth hold storage display part 1401h. Is displayed. In this state, when derivation of the lottery result is started based on the start memory of the first special symbol (here, the start memory of the second special symbol), the second special figure hold of the first hold storage display unit 1401a The image 1422 is deleted. Along with this, the display mode of the other reserved storage display units (second reserved storage display unit 1401b to eighth reserved storage display unit 1401h) is changed to the previous reserved storage display unit (first reserved storage display unit 1401a to 1401a). The seventh hold storage display unit 1401g) is shifted and displayed. As the display mode of each hold storage display unit is shifted forward, the display mode of the last hold storage display unit (eighth hold storage display unit 1401h) becomes a non-display mode.

  Here, “forward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the previous hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference, and the hold storage is displayed. It is displayed as a display mode in the display unit. Specifically, in the above example, as the second special figure holding image 1422 of the first holding memory display unit 1401a is deleted, the fifth holding memory display unit 1401e to the eighth holding memory display. The first special figure hold image 1411 displayed on the part 1401h moves to the fourth hold storage display part 1401d to the seventh hold storage display part 1401g, respectively, so that the fourth hold storage display part 1401d ~ The first special figure hold image 1411 is displayed on the seventh hold storage display unit 1401g, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h is not displayed. In addition, the second special figure hold image 1422 displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b to the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a to the third hold storage display unit 1401c. The second special figure hold image 1422 is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a to the third hold storage display unit 1401c so as to move.

  In the same manner, in the hold display area 1401, the display mode of the head hold storage display unit (first hold storage display unit 1401a) is deleted according to the digestion of the special symbol start-up memory, and another hold is made. A forward display of the display mode in the storage display unit is performed. As a result, the number of holdings (starting memory number) has decreased in accordance with the digestion of the starting memory of the special symbol, and whether the symbol variation based on the starting memory of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been performed, The player can grasp visually.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special figure reservation image 1422 is always displayed in the hold storage display unit before the first special figure reservation image 1411 in the hold display area 1401. Even if the hold by the one special symbol hold counter 4903 is performed before the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 4913, the start memory of the second special symbol is digested before the start memory of the first special symbol. . In other words, as long as there is a hold by the second special symbol hold counter 4913, the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 4903 is not released. Therefore, until the start memory of the second special symbol is all digested, the start memory of the first special symbol is not digested, and only the start memory of the second special symbol continues to be digested.

  When winning the second start opening 2002, the second special figure hold image 1422 is additionally displayed on the first hold storage display section (first hold storage display section 1401a) in the hold display area 1401. On the other hand, the start-up memory of the special symbol corresponding to the display mode of the first on-hold storage display section (first on-hold storage display section 1401a) in the on-hold display area 1401 is digested. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, when there are start memories of a plurality of second special symbols, it seems that the latest start memory held by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 is digested first. . However, the hold order of the second special symbol hold image 1422 displayed in the hold display area 1401 does not necessarily coincide with the derivation order of the start memory of the second special symbol, and is the hold order by the second special symbol hold counter 4913 to the last. It is digested (ie, starting with the previously held start-up memory).

[7. Hold-related effects using hold display area]
Next, the hold-related effect using the hold display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188. This hold-related effect is an effect realized by the hold effect control means as the effect control means 4962 as a result of the special effect process and the fake special effect process described above. In other words, the special effect described above and the fake special effect that cannot be distinguished from the external appearance are performed internally, thereby being executed as a hold-related effect that can be visually recognized. And the expectation degree per special effect is given to a player through this hold related effect.

  Here, the degree of expectation (reliability) per special effect represents the degree to which it can be expected that the special effect determination has been won. In this embodiment, when the special effect determination is won, a reach effect image with a high expectation level that is the result of the success / failure determination is always displayed. It can be said that the degree of expectation that an image is displayed.

[Reservation-related effects in normal gaming state]
FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of a hold-related effect performed by the high-precision lottery prior suggestion unit or the fake hold display exposure effect control unit in a normal game state in which a winning game is mainly performed at the first start port 2001. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an aspect of the hold-related effect that continues from FIG. 183, FIG. 184 is a diagram that confirms that the result of the special effect determination is successful, and FIG. 184 is the hold that continues from FIG. 183. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a related effect, and is a figure which determines that the result of special effect determination was a loss.

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the first start port 2001 in a state where three start memories of the first special random number (the random number for determination of success / failure obtained based on the winning at the first start port 2001) are reserved. When the game ball wins, a white bag is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1401d to indicate that the start memory of the first special random number is held. According to FIG. 183, at this time, a white half character of eel and dog (hereinafter simply referred to as “character”) appears on the white cage displayed on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d. is doing. The character appears in this way when the special effect determination process or the fake special effect determination process performed based on the winning at the start ports 2001 and 2002 is won. Therefore, when a character appears on the white cocoon displayed on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d, the variation of the special symbol for the first special random number corresponding to the display of the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d starts. When this is done, the degree of expectation that a reach effect image with a high degree of expectation for jackpots will be displayed.

  When one start memory of the first special random number is consumed (when start-up variable display displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1401a is started), the display is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1401d. The displayed white character jumps and moves toward the white bag displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c, and then the white character of the third reserved storage display unit 1401c It is displayed above. Then, the white wrinkle displayed on the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d disappears, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d enters a non-display mode. It should be noted that the color of the character moved so as to jump to the white basket displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c remains white.

  In addition, when three start memories of the first special random number are reserved and a white character is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1401c, one start memory of the first special random number is digested. The white character displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1401c is displayed in a moving manner so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b. It is displayed on the white ridge of the memory display unit 1401b. Then, the white haze displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c disappears, and the third reserved storage display unit 1401c enters a non-display mode. Note that the color of the character that has moved so as to jump to the white basket displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401c remains white.

  In addition, when two start memories of the first special random number are reserved and a white character is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1401b, one start memory of the first special random number is digested. The white character displayed on the second on-hold storage display unit 1401b is moved and displayed so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the first on-hold storage display unit 1401b (in FIG. 183, it is still displayed). (It is not displayed on the white eyelid displayed on the 1st holding | maintenance memory | storage display part 1401a). And the white wrinkle currently displayed on the 2nd reservation memory display part 1401b disappears, and the 2nd reservation memory display part 1401b will be in a non-display mode. Note that the color of the character jumping toward the first reserved storage display unit 1401a remains white.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the white bag displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b jumps toward the white model displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401b. When the character thus displayed is safely displayed on the white tile displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, it is determined that the result of the special effect determination is correct. The reach effect image with a high expectation degree of jackpot is always displayed.

  In this way, based on the result of the special effect determination process being a win, the hold-related effect corresponding to the special random number won in this win is different from the normal display mode (display only with a bag). The display control can be executed in the form of the display mode (display in which the character appears on the heel). As a result, for the special random number corresponding to the hold-related effect in which the specific display mode appears, the jackpot winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value to the losing value (2/598) as a result of the winning / failing determination process When the jackpot is won with a probability (1/4) higher than (1/300), the liquid crystal display device 1400 at the time before the design change effect according to the special random number is started. It will be suggested in advance (high-precision lottery prior suggestion means).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the white bag displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b is changed to the white bag displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401b. The character moved and displayed so as to jump up and down disappears outside the frame of the first reserved storage display unit 1401a without being displayed on the white candy displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. Then, it is determined that the result of the special effect determination is a loss (the result of the fake special effect is a hit). Therefore, as long as the result of the determination on the first special symbol is not a win (unless the random number for determination is “7”), a reach effect image with a high expectation of jackpot is not displayed. However, if a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed despite the fact that the special effect determination result is a losing display, there is a possibility that the result of the success / failure determination is a hit. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a game that can make a player feel depressed.

  In this way, although the result of the special effect determination process is lost, the fake special effect display control can be performed in a form in which the specific display mode appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the special effect display control is executed, the display form is changed while the hold display by the fake special effect display control appears before the hold digest status expression means disappears (that is, the determination process is performed). Change control for changing the display from the specific display mode to the normal display mode is further executed (false hold display exposure effect control means).

  In other words, the probability that the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the hit determination table of Table 1 to the loss value (2/598). In this regard, in the above configuration, first, a part of the jackpot value (307) and a part of the loss value (197 to 199) can be discriminated as special effect hit values (see Table 2). The ratio (one quarter) of a part of the jackpot value that can be made to a part of the loss value is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value in the hit determination table of Table 1 above. Become. Here, the ratio of the jackpot value (307 in the present embodiment) included in the per-effect value to the loss value (197 to 199 in the present embodiment) included in the per-effect value in Table 2 is the loss value (in this book) In the embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot value (3,307 in the present embodiment) to the value excluding 3 and 307 in 0 to 599 indicates that the player is actually advantageous when the beneficial effect is performed. Is more than twice as high as possible.

  Incidentally, in FIGS. 183 and 184, the color of the appearing character is white. However, as shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, a red character may appear. Here, FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another aspect of the hold-related effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an aspect of the hold-related effect that continues from FIG. 185, and FIG. 186 is a diagram that confirms that the result of the special effect determination is successful. (B) is a figure which shows the one aspect | mode of the hold related production | presentation which continues from 185, and is a figure which confirms that the result of special production | presentation determination was losing.

  Comparing FIG. 183 and FIG. 184 with FIG. 85 and FIG. 186, it is apparent that only the character color is different, and when the start memory of the first special random number is consumed, the nth reserved memory The manner in which the character is moved and displayed from the display unit (n is one of 2, 3 and 4) toward the (n-1) th reserved storage display unit is the same. However, internally, when the color of the character that has safely reached the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is white, the display of the reach effect image with a high expectation of jackpot is determined, When the color of the character that has reached the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is red, a reach effect image with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is displayed based on the result of the special effect determination process being successful. Expectation is only 50%. Although not shown, when the color of the character reaching the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is black, the result of the special effect determination process is a hit even though the character is displayed. The expectation that a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed based on the fact is 0%. Note that, even when no character is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, the degree of expectation that a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed based on the result of the special effect determination process being won is 0%.

  In the above embodiment, the character appears in the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d. As described above, in the special effect determination process, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 4903 or the second special symbol hold counter 4913 when winning at the start ports 2001 and 2002 is 1 or more (not including the current start win). If the result of the special effect determination process is a hit, it goes without saying that the character can appear in any of the second reserved storage display unit 1401b to the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d. Yes. However, since the fake special effect determination is performed only when the number of start memories of the first special random number is the upper limit “4”, the character is displayed on the second reserved memory display unit 1401b or the third reserved memory display unit 1401c. When appears, it is possible to realize an unprecedented game in which it is determined that the result of the special effect determination process is win before the success / failure determination process (special symbol variation display) is performed. Become.

  Here, in order to avoid the fact that the result of the special effect determination process is successful prior to the execution of the determination process (special symbol variation display), the number of start memories of the first special random number The fake special effect determination process may be performed when is “2” or “3” including the current start winning.

  In the above embodiment, the character is displayed when the result of the special lottery process or the fake special effect determination process for the start memory of the first special random number is a win, but this is not restrictive. It goes without saying that the character may be displayed when the result of the special lottery process or the fake special effect determination process for the random number start-up storage is successful.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 183 to 186, the character does not stop whether or not the character continues to appear in the process where the start memory of the first special random number is digested. For example, a hold-related effect in the promotion mode shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 is also performed. FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating one mode of a hold-related effect in the promotion mode in the normal gaming state. FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the hold-related effect of the promotion aspect continued from FIG. 187. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188.

  As shown in FIG. 187, in the state where three start memories of the first special random number (the random number for determination of success / failure obtained based on the winning to the first start port 2001) are held, the first start port 2001 When the game ball wins, a white bag is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1401d to indicate that the start memory of the first special random number is held. At this time, as shown in the drawing, a black character appears on the white cocoon displayed on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d. As described above, the character appears when the special effect determination process or the fake special effect determination process performed based on the winning at the first start port 2001 is won.

  When one start memory of the first special random number is consumed (when start-up variable display displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1401a is started), the display is displayed on the fourth hold memory display unit 1401d. The black character that has been moved is displayed so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c, and then the white character of the third reserved storage display unit 1401c is displayed. It is displayed above. Then, the white wrinkle displayed on the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d disappears, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d enters a non-display mode. It should be noted that the color of the character moved so as to jump to the white basket displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c remains black.

  In addition, if three start memories of the first special random number are reserved and a black character is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1401c, one start memory of the first special random number is digested. The black character displayed on the third on-hold storage display unit 1401c is moved and displayed so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the second on-hold storage display unit 1401b. It is displayed on the white ridge of the memory display unit 1401b. At this time, the character that was black at the stage of jumping (that is, the stage where it is not known whether or not it is safely displayed on the white bag displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b) When displayed on the white cocoon displayed in the second storage storage display unit 1401b, the color changes to red almost simultaneously. Therefore, at this time (when the character is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b), if the character is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a, the result of the special effect determination process is a hit. Based on the fact, the expectation level at which the reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed is 50%, and the expectation level (0%) when the black character is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a It will be promoted.

  Further, according to FIG. 187, the red character displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b moves so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. After that, it is displayed on the white basket of the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. At this time, when the character that was red at the stage of jumping is displayed on the white bag displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, the character turns white almost simultaneously (see FIG. 188). Based on the fact that the special effect determination process is won and the result of the special effect determination process is a win, the expectation level at which a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed is 100%. However, even if the special effect determination is won, the probability of being a big hit is one-fourth (see Table 2). It will be positioned as a premier production.

  In this way, even if the color of the first appearing character is black with a low expectation, for example, it changes to a red or white with a high expectation in the process of changing the display of the start memory of a plurality of special symbols. It is possible to produce a directing. Thereby, even if a black character, for example, which suggests that a disadvantageous performance that is disadvantageous to the player appears, the disappearance of expectation that may occur due to the appearance of a character with low expectation is reduced.

  That is, when a hold-related effect is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a character (a character colored in any one of black, red, and white) as a display form indicating the reliability with which the result of the special effect determination process is successful ) Can be executed to force the appearance of a black character with a low degree of reliability, for example, to appear on the fence without depending on the result of the special performance determination process. (Low reliability hold forced display control means).

  However, when the low-reliability hold forced display control means adopts a black character which is a specific display form with a low reliability among the characters of the plurality of colors and is displayed on hold, the hold display is the hold digest status expression means While it is appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 before being extinguished, the display form is changed to the result of the special effect determination process among the characters of a plurality of colors based on the result of the special effect determination process being lost. It is possible to execute change control that promotes and changes the display mode to match (forced display release control means).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the color of the character that appears first is black, then changes to red with higher expectation, and then changes to white with higher expectation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which a red character appears first and then changes to white with higher expectation may be used. Moreover, you may change from black to white without passing through red.

  Note that the above-described hold-related effects including the timing at which the color of the character changes is stored as schedule data corresponding to the display commands stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b (hold display mode storage means). Based on this schedule data, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a realizes a hold-related effect.

  By the way, as described above, if the character appears in the first reserved storage display unit 1401a as shown in FIGS. 184 (a), 186 (a), and 188 (a), the special effect determination process is performed. The expectation level at which a reach effect image with a high expectation level of jackpot is displayed based on the winning result is 100% or 50%. Then, when a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed based on the result of the special effect determination process being a win, the character that has appeared in the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is the reach effect image. The reach control means 4962 realizes a reach effect such that the image is moved and displayed toward the screen and added to the reach effect image as it is. Thereby, it can be easily grasped that there is a relationship between the hold-related effect and the reach effect image.

  In addition, even if the character is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a, when the result of the special effect determination process is lost, the character that has appeared on the first hold storage display unit 1401a is displayed. It disappears quietly outside the frame of the first hold storage display unit 1401a. At this time, since the result of the special effect determination process is a loss, it is unlikely that a reach effect image with a high degree of expectation of jackpot will be displayed. However, in the normal gaming state in which the probability variation function does not operate, “7” included in the hit value of the first special symbol hit determination table shown in Table 1 above is the first special symbol shown in Table 2 above. Since it is not included in the per-effect value in the special effect determination table, when the random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on the winning to the first start port 2001 is “7”, the first hold storage display unit 1401a Even if the character that has appeared quietly disappears outside the frame of the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, a reach effect image with a high expectation of jackpot is rarely displayed. As a result, even if an unfavorable effect that is disadvantageous to the player is performed, there is a possibility that a jackpot will be generated, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation until the end.

  As described above, in the process of starting the special random number starting memory, the hold-related effect of the promotion mode in which the degree of expectation that the reach effect image with the high degree of expectation of the jackpot is displayed as the starting memory is digested is explained. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the process of starting a special random number start memory, a hold-related effect of a demotion mode is performed in which a reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed as the start memory is digested. You may be made to be. This hold-related effect in the demoted mode will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the demotion-related hold-related effect is performed only when the result of the special effect determination process is a loss and the result of the fake special effect determination process is a hit. In the above-described promotion-related hold-related effects, a black character or a red character appears first. However, in this demotion-related reservation-related effects, although not shown, a white or red character appears first. To do.

  When one start memory of the first special random number is consumed (when start-up variable display displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1401a is started), the nth hold memory display unit (n is The white or red character displayed in any one of (2, 3, 4) is moved and displayed so as to jump toward the white bag displayed on the (n-1) th reserved storage display unit, Then, it is displayed on the white nail of the (n-1) th reserved storage display unit 1401c. Then, the character that has moved so as to jump to the white basket of the (n-1) th reserved storage display section may change from white or red to black at an appropriate movement timing. It should be noted that a pattern that changes from white to red may be included, and the character display may disappear instead of the change from black to black.

Note that the pattern in which the color of the white or red character changes is stored, for example, as follows.
A red character appears on the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1401c (selection ratio 0.2).
A white character appears on the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1401c (selection ratio 0.15).
A red character appears on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b (selection ratio 0.4).
A white character appears on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b (selection ratio 0.07).
A red character appears on the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a (selection ratio 0.17).
A white character appears on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d and changes to black when moved and displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a (selection ratio 0.01).

  In this way, even if the color of the first appearing character is white, which has a high degree of expectation, for example, the expectation changes to black with 0% in the process of performing the variable display for the start memory of a plurality of special symbols. It is possible to produce an effect. When the result of the special effect determination process is successful, a white or red character appears first, and although a white or red character can appear as it is to the end, a demoting effect as described above can be performed, which is advantageous. Even if, for example, a white character is suggested to be produced, it can never be relieved, and an effect that can be enjoyed to the end can be realized.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state, any one of the above-described promotion-related hold-related effects and the demotion-related reservation-related effects is displayed on the nth reserved storage display unit (n is 2, 3, or 4). The color changes when the character is moved and displayed on the (n-1) th hold storage display section (that is, when one hold is consumed). However, the timing at which the color of the character changes (the timing at which the degree of expectation changes) is not limited to this, and the character is moved and displayed from the nth reserved storage display portion to the (n−1) reserved storage display portion. It may be performed during a predetermined time. That is, when the symbol variation effect for the special random number displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 1401a is performed, the character is changed from the nth reserved memory display unit to the (n-1) th reserved memory display unit. However, it is not necessary for the player to watch the symbol variation effect for a predetermined time after the symbol variation effect is started until, for example, reach is displayed. Therefore, at this time when there is little need for the player to watch the fluctuating effects of the symbols, the player can pay attention to the hold-related effects by performing the hold-related effects of the promotion mode or the hold-related effects of the demoted mode Is possible. In addition, since it can be a boring time for the player for a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation effect, the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed by using this time for the hold related effect. It is possible to have a constant interest.

  In the present embodiment, since the fake special effect determination process is performed when the number of starting memories of the first special random number is the upper limit, in all the above patterns, first, a white or red character Appears in the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d. Therefore, if the fake special effect determination process is performed regardless of whether the number of start memories of the first special random number is the upper limit, first, a white or red character is displayed in the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d. It does not restrict to the aspect which appears in.

[Reservation-related effects in special gaming state]
As described above, since the second special random number hold release (holding digestion) is prioritized over the first special random number hold release (holding digestion), the special game in which the winning game of the second start port 2002 is mainly performed. In the state, if both the hold of the first special random number and the hold of the second special random number are stored up to the upper limit, they are displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the hold-related effect in the special game state.

As described above, the mode effect is executed in the special game state. In this mode effect, although the internal control is the same (that is, the gaming state is the same), the degree of disadvantage for the player changes. Specifically, the game is performed under one of the following mode effects, although the control is internally the same.
・ Disadvantage production mode in which disadvantageous games can be performed against the player ・ Advantageous production mode in which disadvantageous games are not disadvantaged for the player ・ Although disadvantageous games can be performed against the player, this disadvantageous game Avoidance mode that can be avoided ・ First special figure digestion mode that is more advantageous to digest cancellation of hold of the first special random number

  Each mode effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a mode effect as an aspect of the hold-related effect in the special game state.

  In the special game state, a process related to the mode effect is performed instead of the special effect determination process performed in the normal game state. In the process related to this mode effect, if it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win based on the symbol random number obtained by winning a game ball at the start ports 2001 and 2002, this jackpot type is determined. A jackpot type determination process and a display mode determination process for determining a display mode to be displayed as a hold-related effect based on the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process are performed. Note that the jackpot type determination process and the display mode determination process, which are performed as processes related to the above-described mode effect, are performed prior to the determination as to whether or not the special effect determination process is performed.

  In the above jackpot type determination process, if it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, only when it is determined that the hit type is the first long open jackpot, as shown in FIG. Displayed bombs are displayed. That is, when the result of the determination process is the first long open jackpot, the special gaming state shifts to the short gaming state when the probability changing function is not activated, so that the player is a jackpot type that the player does not want to win. However, even if an ignited bomb is displayed, the jackpot type determination process is performed prior to the success / failure determination process, and therefore, when the ignited bomb is displayed, the probability of a jackpot is 30 minutes. Only 1 (see Table 1). Thus, even if the ignited bomb is displayed, the end of the special gaming state is not fixed, so until the suspended digest (symbol fluctuation) is performed for the starting memory where this bomb is displayed, Give a sense of tension.

  For example, in FIG. 189 (a), the ignited bomb is displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e, and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1401f. The second reserved memory display unit 1401b holds the start memory of the second special random number, and the fifth reserved memory display unit 1401e and the eighth reserved memory display unit 1401f start the first special random number. Memory is pending. At this time, there is no way to avoid holding the start-up storage of the second special random number in the second hold memory display unit 1401b, and a determination as to whether or not it is always made. Even if the determination result of the second special random number start-up storage in the second reserved memory display unit 1401b is lost, the fifth reserved memory display unit 1401e and the eighth reserved memory display unit 1401f The ignited bomb is displayed. Therefore, at the time when all the holdings for the start memory of the second special random number are digested, the holding for the starting memory of the first special random number is digested and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2002 There is no choice as to which is better. In other words, the display mode of FIG. 189 (a) is the first disadvantageous to the player regardless of whether the start memory is reserved for the second special random number or the start memory is reserved for the first special random number. This is a disadvantage production mode in which a disadvantageous game in which a long open jackpot may be won is performed.

  In FIG. 189 (b), the lit bomb is not displayed on any of the first storage storage display sections 1401a to 1401h. At this time, the probability of winning the first long open jackpot is 0%, while the possibility of winning the second long open jackpot remains. That is, the display mode of FIG. 189 (b) is an advantageous performance mode in which a disadvantageous game that is not disadvantageous to the player is not performed in that the transition from the special gaming state to the short gaming state cannot be performed when the probability changing function is not activated. It is.

  In FIG. 189 (c), the ignited bomb is displayed only on the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1401f. That is, since the ignited bomb is not displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1401a to the fourth hold memory display unit 1401d in which the start storage of the second special random number is held, As long as it is not determined whether or not the start memory of one special random number is determined, the transition to the short-time gaming state can be avoided. Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 189 (c), in the special game state in which winning to the second start port 2002 is promoted, the second start port 2002 is kept so as not to hold the start memory of the second special random number. It can be said that it is an unfavorable game avoidance mode in which a game can be won so that a transition to a short-time game state can be avoided.

  In the disadvantageous game avoidance mode of FIG. 189 (c), the time-saving game is performed without performing the reservation for the start memory of the first special random number in the fifth reserved memory display unit 1401e and the eighth reserved memory display unit 1401f. If the player is transferred to the state, even if it is the first long open jackpot, the player wants to win, so there is no longer a desire to avoid the transition from the special game state to the normal game state . Furthermore, since the probability that the result of the success / failure determination is a win is 1/300 (see Table 1) in the short-time gaming state, the display of the ignited bomb has no meaning.

  Therefore, not only in the case of FIG. 189 (c), when the special gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state, a process of extinguishing all ignited bombs displayed in the special gaming state is performed. At this time, if the player remembers where the bomb that was ignited in the special gaming state was displayed, what kind of hit is given along with the display mode of the character that can be displayed after changing to the short-time gaming state It is possible to guess what will be done. Based on such a guess, the player can be given a room for thinking about a game strategy such as what kind of game should be performed (for example, whether or not to hold the first special random number should be digested or avoided). It is possible to provide an unprecedented gameplay such as this.

  Further, in FIG. 189 (d), the ignited bomb is displayed only on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c. Here, if the first long open jackpot is not won even if the hold for the start memory of the second special random number in the third hold memory display unit 1401c is performed, the start memory for the second special random number will not be won. At the time when all the holdings have been consumed, the player either digests the holding for the start memory of the first special random number that has already been put on, or allows the second starting port 2002 to win a game ball. It is possible to select whether to perform. However, when a game ball is won at the second starting port 2002, an ignited bomb may be displayed, so the first special random number holding release that may win the second long open jackpot is released. It is more advantageous for the player to digest the game. That is, it can be said that the display mode of FIG. 189 (d) is a first special figure digest mode in which it is more advantageous to digest the hold release of the first special random number.

  In this way, when a hold-related effect is performed in the special game state, the effect state for the player is different in any one of the effect modes, although the internal game state is the same. A game will be played. In addition, as to which presentation mode the game is played, it is possible to shift each time the suspension of the start-up memory of the special random number is consumed, so that an effect that gives the player a feeling of inflection is realized.

  In FIG. 189, the degree of risk for the player is represented by the length of the lead wire of the ignited bomb. For example, it is inevitable that the second reserved random number display unit 1401b in FIG. 189 (a) and the third reserved storage display unit 1401c in FIG. The lead wire has been shortened to remind us of an image that will explode soon. In addition, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e in FIG. 189 (a), the eighth reserved storage display unit 1401h in FIG. 189 (a), the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e in FIG. 189 (c), and FIG. The starting storage of the first special random number in the eighth reserved storage display unit 1401h in (c) is avoided as long as the reserved special digest of the second special random number is given priority over the reserved special digest of the first special random number. Because it is possible, the lead wire is long to remind you of an image that still takes a while before it explodes. Note that since the first special random number starting storage of the eighth reserved storage display unit 1401h is more difficult to hold than the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e, the first special random number is reserved. The bomb lead displayed on the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h is longer than the bomb lead displayed on the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e.

  In the above, in the jackpot type determination process, if it is determined that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, the hit type is determined to be the first long open jackpot (that is, the probability variation function is not activated). As shown in FIG. 189, the ignited bomb is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot type determination process, if it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, the hit type is the second long open big hit or the short open big hit (that is, the operation of the probability variation function continues). Even when the determination is made, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability, and an ignited bomb may be displayed based on the result of the lottery. At this time, before the determination process of whether or not the special random number corresponding to the ignited bomb is performed, the true result (the operation of the probability variation function is continued if it is assumed that the result of the determination process is successful). It is preferable to extinguish the display of the ignited bomb (promotion mode). As a result, a risky performance as if the probability variation function is deactivated is performed at a high frequency, and the boring feeling such as simply waiting for the result of the success / failure determination process to win is reduced. Can do. On the other hand, in the jackpot type determination process, if it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win, the hit type is the first long open big hit (that is, the probability variation function is deactivated). Even when it is determined that there is a lottery, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability, and an ignited bomb may not be displayed based on the result of the lottery. At this time, before performing the process of determining whether or not the special random number is determined not to display the ignited bomb, it is assumed that the true change result (if the result of the determination process is correct, the probability variation function is not activated). It is preferable to make an ignited bomb appear (exposure mode) in order to expose the result of being successful. As a result, even if the ignited bomb is not displayed, it is possible to make the player always aware that there is a risk that the probability variation function will be deactivated, and the result of the success / failure determination process will be just a hit. You can reduce the feeling of boredom just waiting. Note that only one or both of the above-described promotion mode and demotion mode may be employed.

  By the way, in the hold-related effect in the special game state, the special effect determination process using the random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on winning in the start ports 2001 and 2002 is not performed. This is because, for example, when the first special random number (random number for determination of success / failure) acquired based on winning in the first start port 2001 is a random number determined to be a hit in the determination process of success / failure, If it is not displayed and a display indicating that the result of the special effect determination process is successful, the first special random number is likely to be a second long open jackpot that activates the probability variation function, and the player is happy. This may result in scolding.

  In the above, in the special gaming state, the special effect determination process using the random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on the winning at the start ports 2001 and 2002 is not performed intentionally, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when a special effect determination process is performed using a random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on winning at the start ports 2001 and 2002, the gaming state at that time is determined and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, a short-time game) In the state), the result of the special effect determination process may not be displayed.

  Further, if it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process performed based on the design random number is a win, when the result of the jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is the first long open jackpot (ie, ignition is performed) When a bomb is displayed), special effect determination processing may be performed and the result may be displayed. Because, at this time, not only is it unlikely that the player will be grateful, but one special random number hold display will show both the ignited bomb and the result of the special performance judgment process Then, the end of the special gaming state can be more realistic when the success / failure determination process for this one special random number is performed, so until the result of the determination process for this one special random number is displayed. This is because a great tension can be given to the player during the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state, when it is assumed that the result of the determination of success / failure is a win, whether or not the probability variation function is a win is displayed by a bomb pattern. It is not limited to. For example, when there are provided a low hit (per round with a small number of rounds) and a high hit (per round with a high number of rounds), for example, by displaying the number of rounds, You may make it give.

[Direction-related effects in short-time gaming state]
As described above, since the release of the second special random number (holding digestion) is prioritized over the release of the first special random number (holding digestion), the winning of the second starting port 2002 is mainly performed even in the short-time gaming state. A game is performed. However, since it is a game normal state in which the probability changing function is not activated, the desire that the first long open jackpot is not won is unlikely to grow in the player as in the special game state.

  Here, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an aspect of the hold-related effect in the short-time gaming state. As shown in FIG. 190, when the special gaming state is shifted to the short-time gaming state, all the ignited bombs displayed in the special gaming state disappear as described above. At this time, in the short game state, similar to the normal game state, the special effect determination process is performed prior to the determination of success / failure by using the randomness for determination of success / failure acquired by winning at the start ports 2001 and 2002. Then, when the number of start memories of the second special random number is the upper limit “4” and the result of the second special symbol special effect determination process is a loss, the fake special effect determination is performed. However, the determination of the fake special effect is not necessarily limited to the upper limit “4” of the number of start memories of the second special random number.

  In the short-time gaming state, as shown in FIG. 190, characters are displayed on all of the first reserved memory display unit 1401a to the eighth reserved memory display unit 1401h. And it is displayed so that it may repeatedly jump up and down on the cage | basket of each holding | maintenance memory | storage display part, and a holding related effect is performed.

  Here, when the result of the special effect determination process is a win or when the result of the fake special effect determination process is a win, a white or red character is used except for a case where a hold-related effect of a promotion mode described later is performed. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the special effect determination process is lost and the result of the fake special effect determination process is also lost, a black character is displayed except when a hold-related effect of a demotion mode described later is performed. Is done. When a white character is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, it is determined that the result of the special effect determination is successful, and when the determination is made (special symbol variation), A reach effect image with a high expectation is displayed. In addition, if a red character is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, there is a possibility that the result of the special effect determination is a hit, and when the determination is made (special symbol variation), A reach effect image with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is displayed with a reliability of 50%. Further, if the character displayed on first hold storage display unit 1401a is black, it is determined that both the special effect determination and the fake special effect determination processing result are lost, and the jackpot expectation is high. The reach effect image is not displayed, and the loss variation is always displayed.

  In addition, even in the short game state at this time, in the process where the starting memory of the special random number is digested, the degree of expectation that the reach effect image with the high expectation degree of jackpot is displayed is promoted as the starting memory is digested In the process where the hold-related effect of the aspect and the start memory of the special random number are digested, the expectation degree that the reach effect image with the high expectation value of the jackpot is displayed is demoted as the start memory is digested Hold-related effects are performed.

  The hold-related effect of the promotion mode in the short-time gaming state is that, for example, a black character changes to red when repeatedly jumping up and down on the bag (see the sixth hold storage display unit 1401f in FIG. 190). . In the short-time gaming state, the color of the character is changed only once, so when the color changes from black to, for example, red, the big win is based on the fact that the result of the special effect determination process is win. The expectation level at which the reach effect image having a high expectation level is displayed is 50%, which is promoted from the expectation level (0%) when the black character remains.

  Further, when the character repeatedly jumps up and down on the bag, for example, a black character may turn white (see the sixth reserved storage display unit 1401f in FIG. 190). At this time, it is confirmed that the special effect determination has been won, and the expectation degree that the reach effect image with a high jackpot expectation level is displayed is 100% based on the fact that the result of the special effect determination process is a win, in this case The expectation has been promoted. However, even if the special effect determination is won, the probability of being a big hit is one-fourth (see Table 2), so it rarely changes to a white character, and is positioned as a premier effect.

  In this way, even if the color of the first appearing character is a black with a low expectation, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of changing to a red or white with a high expectation in the process of repeatedly jumping up and down on the fence . Thereby, even if a black character, for example, which suggests that an unfavorable winning start game is performed, disappearance of expectation that may occur due to the appearance of a character with low expectation is reduced.

  By the way, as mentioned above, in the short-time gaming state, the color of the character changes when repeatedly jumping up and down on the cage, regardless of whether the promotion mode or the demotion mode is the hold-related effect. Expectation changes. Here, for a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation effect corresponding to the special random number displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a until the reach is displayed, the player changes the symbol. Since there is little need to pay attention to the production, the timing of changing the color of the character (the timing at which the degree of expectation changes) is a variation of the design of the special random number displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. It is preferable that the time is changed (more specifically, for a predetermined period of time after the effect of changing the symbol for the special random number displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is started). This predetermined time is a time when it is not necessary for the player to pay attention to the change effect of the symbol, and during this time, the hold-related effect of the promotion mode or the hold-related effect of the demotion mode is performed to the player. It becomes possible to turn attention to. In addition, since it can be a boring time for the player for a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation effect, the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed by using this time for the hold related effect. It is possible to have a constant interest.

  Note that the “winning start game” is performed using a game that is triggered by winning at the start ports 2001, 2002, for example, a random number for determination of success / failure acquired based on winning at the start ports 2001, 2002. Special effect determination and success / failure determination processing and jackpot game are included.

  Note that when the color of the character changes when the result of the special effect determination process is successful or when the result of the fake special effect determination process is successful, there are a plurality of patterns with different timings of change. One of the patterns is selected from the stored on-hold effect pattern table. This table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the color of the character that appears first is black and then changes to red or white, which has a higher expectation, but this is not a limitation. A mode in which a character appears and then changes to white with higher expectation may be used.

  By the way, as in the normal gaming state, when a reach effect image with a high expectation degree of jackpot is displayed based on the result of the special effect determination process being win, it appears in the first hold storage display unit 1401a. The reach control means 4962 realizes a reach effect in which the character that has been moved and displayed toward the reach effect image is added to the reach effect image as it is. Thereby, it can be easily grasped that there is a relationship between the hold-related effect and the reach effect image.

  If the color of the character displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a is black, it is determined that the result of the special effect determination process is lost, and the special symbol is changed. At this time, it disappears quietly outside the frame of the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. At this time, since the result of the special effect determination process is a loss, the result of the determination is not successful. This is because the hit value of the hit determination table of the first special symbol in which the probability changing function shown in Table 1 is operating, and the win value of the special effect determination table of the second special symbol shown in Table 2 above Is the same value. As a result, when it is determined that the result of the special performance determination is a win but the result of the success / failure determination is losing, it is unfortunate that “I was elected in the special gaming state” Reality can be given.

  Further, although the hold-related effect in the demoted mode in the short-time gaming state is not illustrated, for example, when the character repeatedly jumps up and down on the bag, the white character changes to black. In the short-time gaming state, the color of the character is changed only once. Therefore, for example, when the color changes from white to black, it is determined that the result of the special effect determination process is lost.

  The timing at which the color of the character changes is stored when a result of the special effect determination process is a win or when a result of the fake special effect determination process is a hit, a plurality of patterns having different timings are stored. One of the reserved production pattern tables is selected and determined. This table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In this way, even if the color of the first appearing character is white with high expectation, for example, when the character repeatedly jumps up and down on the basket, the expectation changes to black with 0% expectation. Yes. When the result of the special effect determination process is successful, a white or red character appears first, and although a white or red character can appear as it is until the end, the above-mentioned demoting effect can be performed, which is advantageous. Even if, for example, a white character that suggests that a winning start game is to be played appears, it can never be relieved, and it is possible to realize a stunning performance until the end.

  By the way, in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, the above-described hold-related effects are displayed in the lower area located in the lower part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 which is the main display area. In the central part of the display area, a symbol variation indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed so as to pay attention to the result of the determination.

  However, when all characters as the specific condition are black based on the transition from the special gaming state to the short-time gaming state, the hold-related effects displayed in the lower area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 This is performed in the main display area.

  The jackpot value (7 and 307 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the gaming state where the probability variation function is not activated (including the short-time gaming state is included) It is included in the value per performance. Therefore, when the symbol variation effect for the reserved special random number is performed, the player can know the result of the success before the result of the success or failure is displayed, and the symbol variation effect is no longer meaningful. It will be a waste. Then, instead of this symbol variation effect, the hold-related effect itself is an effect in which the result of the success / failure can be known. In addition, since a plurality of special random numbers (four each of the first special random number and the second special random number) can be reserved, the player can be simultaneously shown the effect on whether or not the special random number is held. Production is realized. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the hold-related effect is performed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Also, in the short-time gaming state, in view of the fact that the holding-related effect is performed as an effect related to the success / failure while the result of the determination process is already grasped when the design variation effect is performed, the reach form A control that eliminates the execution of reach production (symbol fluctuation that requires a relatively long time) with a high expectation level with a big win (control to digest the winning start game that has been put on hold for a short time) (Specific state variation control means). Even if the execution of the reach effect is omitted, in the short-time gaming state, the game ball can easily enter the second start port 2002, and there is no possibility that the holding will be interrupted.

  When the above-described control that omits the execution of the reach effect that has a high probability of being a big hit with the reach form is performed, for the variation effect of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is obvious that it is difficult to have expectations. However, coupled with “ease of appearance of a new hold display in the short-time gaming state”, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a hold display (for example, a white character) having the above-described highly reliable display form appears newly, That is, interest is drawn as to whether or not the hold-related effect displayed when the result of the special effect determination process is determined to be successful.

  That is, according to such a continuous hold display (holding effect) realized by performing control that does not have any expectation in the symbol effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (short-term digestion of the winning start game), Due to the jackpot probability that is often set to be low, it is possible to suitably maintain the amusement interest without relying on the fluctuating effects of symbols that are unlikely to have high expectations. In addition, after it is suggested through the hold-related effect that a random number for determining whether or not to be determined to be a win in the special effect determination process is suggested through the hold-related effect, it is determined to be determined to be lost in the special effect determination process. A process is realized in which a jackpot lottery is performed with a higher probability than the winning probability in which the possibility of being a random number is excluded, that is, the winning probability determined in the winning determination table of Table 1. Then, such a high degree of expectation is expressed as a high expectation symbol variation effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400, so that the player's gaming interest is suitably maintained.

  In the short-time game state, it is not always necessary to perform the hold-related effect in the main display area as the substantially central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the hold-related effect is performed in the lower region of the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the short-time game state. At the same time, a design variation effect may be performed in the main display area. At this time, for example, a character appearing in a background effect displayed behind the symbol effect that is displayed in the main display area has an effect as if acting on a character displayed as a hold-related effect. You may go. For example, in the past, a character that appeared as if it had an effect on a symbol when the symbol fluctuated effect changed the color of the character that appeared, for example, on the bag as a hold-related effect in this embodiment It is good to make such a production. In this way, the player's attention is given more importance to the hold-related effect than the fluctuating effect of the symbol, and originally it is difficult to have high expectations due to the jackpot probability that is often set low It is possible to enjoy the effect exerted by the hold-related effect in the short-time gaming state such that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained without depending on the symbol variation effect.

  As described above, the hold-related effects in each game state have been described. As described above, the results of the special effect determination process are displayed in the normal game state and the short-time game state, and the results of the special effect determination process are displayed in the special game state. The winning type is displayed when it is assumed that the result of the success / failure determination process is a win.

  Therefore, when the result of the special effect determination process for the success / failure determination random number acquired in the normal game state or the short-time game state is correct, the character is displayed as the hold-related effect, but when this character is displayed In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination process for the success / failure determination random number acquired earlier is a win, the character is extinguished.

  If the bomb ignited by the special random number corresponding to the displayed character is displayed when the special gaming state is changed, the probability changing function does not operate for the special random number displayed by the character. There is a high possibility that the first long open jackpot. On the other hand, if the bomb ignited by the special random number corresponding to the displayed character is not displayed when the special gaming state is changed, the probability changing function is activated for the special random number displayed by the character. There is a high possibility that the second long open jackpot or short open jackpot.

  Even if the character is displayed in the normal game state or the short-time game state, the display of the character disappears when the character is changed to the special game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player can remember the character displayed in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state, so that the display of the ignited bomb that can be displayed after changing to the special gaming state. It is possible to infer what hits are given together with the presence or absence. Based on such a guess, the player can be given a room for thinking about a game strategy such as what kind of game should be performed (for example, whether or not to hold the first special random number should be digested or avoided). It is possible to provide an unprecedented gameplay such as this.

  By the way, as described above, in the present embodiment, the random number for determination of success / failure (second special random number) acquired based on the winning at the second starting port 2002 is acquired based on the winning at the first starting port 2001. Since it is digested in preference to the determined random number for determination (first special random number), a hold display is performed so that it can be grasped. Hereinafter, the holding mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing (a) a mode of holding in a normal gaming state where the time-shortening function is not activated, and (b) a diagram showing a mode of holding in a special gaming state where the time-shortening function is activated.

  In the normal gaming state, the game is won mainly at the first starting port 2001 rather than at the second starting port 2002. In the uppermost row of FIG. 191 (a), a normal display mode (display mode of only white candy) indicating that the result of the special effect determination process for the first special random number is a loss is the first reserved storage display unit. A specific display mode (display mode in which a character appears on a white bag) displayed in 1401a and indicating that the result of the special effect determination process for the first special random number may be a second hold It is displayed on the storage display unit 1401b. When winning in the second starting port 2002 in this state, a display mode (display mode of only red candy) indicating that the second starting port 2002 has been won is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a. The normal display mode displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a is shifted and displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b, and the specific display mode displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b. Is shifted and displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the second special random number won at the second start port 2002 later has priority over the first special random number won at the first start port 2001, and the hold is digested. It has become.

  When winning in the first starting port 2001 in this state, the display mode (display mode of only white candy) indicating that the first starting port 2001 is won and the result of the special effect determination process is lost is the fourth reserved storage. It is displayed on the display unit 1401d. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the priority of digestion of the hold is the lowest among the reserved special random numbers. In addition, the display of the 1st holding | maintenance memory | storage part 1401a-the 3rd holding | maintenance memory | storage part 1401c is as it is, unless winning a prize to the 2nd starting port 2002 or a holding | maintenance is digested.

  Further, when winning in the first starting port 2001 in this state, a display mode (display mode in which a character appears on a white candy) indicating that the first starting port 2001 has been won and the result of the special effect determination process is winning. Is displayed on the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the priority of digestion of the hold is the lowest among the reserved special random numbers. In addition, the display of the 1st hold | maintenance memory | storage display part 1401a-the 4th hold | maintenance memory | storage display part 1401d is as it is unless it wins the 2nd start port 2002 or a hold | maintenance is digested.

  On the other hand, in the special game state, the time shortening function operates, so that the game is won mainly at the second start port 2002 rather than the first start port 2001. In the uppermost part of FIG. 191 (b), a display mode (display mode of only red candy) indicating that there is no risk that the probability variation function is not activated is displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1401a, and the probability variation function is displayed. A display mode (a display mode in which a bomb is ignited on a white kite) indicating that the first special random number at risk of being inactive is being held is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b. . At this time, the length of the bomb lead displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b is shorter than the length of the bomb guide displayed on the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e. As a result, when the first special random number displayed on the second reserved storage display unit 1401b is digested rather than the first special random number displayed on the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e, the probability variation function is improved. It can be understood that there is a high risk of becoming inactive.

  In this state, when the second starting port 2002 is won, a display mode indicating that there is a risk of winning the second starting port 2002 and the probability changing function being deactivated (a display mode in which there is a bomb ignited on a red kite) ) Is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 1401b. Then, the displays of the second reserved storage display unit 1401b to the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401e are shifted and displayed on the third reserved storage display unit 1401c to the sixth reserved storage display unit 1401f, respectively. As a result, the second special random number that is won in the second start port 2002 later has priority over the first special random number that is reserved in the second reserved storage display unit 1401b to the fifth reserved storage display unit 1401f. It is now possible to clearly understand that the hold will be consumed. In addition, the shift displayed from the second hold storage display unit 1401b to the third hold storage display unit 1401c and the shift display from the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e to the sixth hold storage display unit 1401f are displayed. Since the hold was far from the risk of being digested, the length of the lead was lengthened with the shift display. Thereby, the player can grasp that he / she is far from the risk that the probability changing function may be deactivated.

  When winning in the second starting port 2002 in this state, the display mode (display mode of only a red eyelid) indicating that there is no risk of winning the second starting port 2002 and the probability changing function being deactivated is the third reserved memory. It is displayed on the display unit 1401c. Then, the displays of the third reserved storage display unit 1401c to the sixth reserved storage display unit 1401f are shifted and displayed on the fourth reserved storage display unit 1401d to the seventh reserved storage display unit 1401g, respectively. As a result, the second special random number that is won in the second start port 2002 later takes precedence over the first special random number that is reserved in the third reserved storage display unit 1401c to the sixth reserved storage display unit 1401e. It is now possible to clearly understand that the hold will be consumed. In addition, the shift displayed from the third hold storage display unit 1401c to the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d and the shift display from the sixth hold storage display unit 1401f to the seventh hold storage display unit 1401g are displayed. Since the hold was far from the risk of being digested, the length of the lead was further increased with the shift display. Thus, the player can grasp that the probability variation function is further away from the risk that the probability changing function may be deactivated.

  Furthermore, when winning in the second starting port 2002 in this state, the display mode (display mode of only a red eyelid) indicating that there is no risk of winning the second starting port 2002 and the probability changing function being inoperative is the fourth hold. It is displayed on the storage display unit 1401d. Then, the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d to the seventh hold storage display unit 1401g is shifted and displayed on the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e to the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h, respectively. As a result, the second special random number that is won in the second start port 2002 later takes precedence over the first special random number that is held in the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d to the seventh hold storage display unit 1401f. It is now possible to clearly understand that the hold will be consumed. In addition, the shift displayed from the fourth hold storage display unit 1401d to the fifth hold storage display unit 1401e and the shift display from the seventh hold storage display unit 1401g to the eighth hold storage display unit 1401h are displayed. Since the hold was far from the risk of being digested, the length of the squib was further increased with the shift display. Thus, the player can grasp that the probability variation function is further away from the risk that the probability changing function may be deactivated.

  In this way, when there is a possibility that the probability variation function may be deactivated in the special gaming state, the ignited bomb is displayed as a display mode indicating that there is a risk that the probability variation function is deactivated, and this ignition When the bomb is shifted from the (n-1) th hold memory display to the nth hold memory display (n is 2, 3 or 4), it is far from the risk that the probability variation function may become inoperative So that the length of the lead wire is increased with the shift display. On the other hand, when the ignited bomb is shifted from the nth reserved memory display unit to the (n-1) th reserved memory display unit (n is 2, 3 or 4), the probability changing function is It is preferable that the length of the lead wire is shortened with the shift display so that it can be grasped that the risk of becoming inoperable is approaching.

  However, the timing at which the length of the ignited lead wire is changed (the timing at which the degree of risk that the probability variation function is deactivated) is not limited to this, and the n-th reserved storage display unit starts from the nth The bomb that has been ignited from the nth reserved memory display unit to the (n-1) th reserved memory display unit is displayed for a predetermined time after the ignited bomb is moved and displayed on the reserved memory display unit. It may be performed during a predetermined time after that.

  It should be noted that the time required for the length of the lead wire to change may be momentary, but that the length of the lead wire has changed (that is, the degree of risk that the probability variation function will be inactive has changed). It is preferable to change over the predetermined time so that it can be grasped in appearance.

  In addition, as the special random number displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1401a is digested, the ignited bomb is changed from the nth hold storage display unit to the (n−1) hold storage display unit. When the display is moved and displayed, the predetermined time is a part or all of the time from the start of the design variation effect for the digested special random number until the reach is displayed, for example. Preferably there is. This is because it is not necessary for the player to watch the symbol variation effect until the reach is displayed, for example, after the symbol variation effect for the digested special random number is started. Therefore, by changing the length of the lead wire using this time when it is not necessary for the player to pay attention to the fluctuating effects of the symbols, the player is changing the degree of risk that the probability variation function will be deactivated. It becomes possible to appeal to the visual sense of.

  As described above, the best mode for carrying out the present invention has been described. Thus, the following specific effects can be obtained.

  Conventionally, the winning probability of winning a jackpot is a winning determination table 4906 stored in a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (first winning random number storage means, more precisely, a ROM storing the winning determination table 4906, see Table 1). Is determined by the ratio of the winning value (3,307) to the lost value stored in (in this embodiment, the value excluding 3 and 307 out of 0 to 599).

  In this type of gaming machine, the determination process of the random number value acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening is performed before the symbol variation effect is performed, and the result of the determination process is obtained. In some cases, a pre-production is performed so as to make the player grasp the stage when it is put on hold. However, in the gaming machine in which the above-mentioned pre-production is performed, if the pre-production is not performed, the sense of expectation for the jackpot will be lost. Had been done. However, when the pre-production of the gaze was performed, even if the pre-production was performed, the player who knew the mechanism of the pre-production had distrust. That is, there is a demerit in both cases where the pre-rendering effect is performed and when it is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the determination processing for the random number value acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the start ports 2001 and 2002 is performed when the symbol variation effect is performed. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of jackpot prior to the success / failure determination process from the time of the suspension state, while keeping the result of the failure determination process regarding the start-up memory still in the hold state in a concealed state. Yes.

  Specifically, the gaming machine in the present embodiment stores a special effect determination table 4908 (second winning random number storage means, more precisely, a special effect determination table 4908) stored in a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a. ROM, see Table 2). In the special effect determination table 4908, a part of the jackpot value (307 in the present embodiment) and a part of the loss value (197 to 199 in the present embodiment) stored in the hit determination table 4906 are stored as the special effect hit value. Is stored so as to be discriminable. Here, the ratio of a part of the jackpot value to a part of the above-mentioned lost value that can be discriminated (in this embodiment, a quarter) is the lost value (of 0 to 599) stored in the hit determination table. (A value excluding 3 and 307) is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value (3,307).

  As a result, a high-accuracy random number group (stored in the special effect determination table in Table 2) which is preferentially set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value stored in the hit determination table (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot). A group of performance values per production) will be created. In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group (No. 1) which is sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the big hit value to the lost value stored in the hit determination table of Table 1 above Of the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and determined in the 1 hit determination table, a group of 1 random value that is not registered as the special effect value in the second special effect determination table is naturally created. (Paired relationship with high-precision random number group).

  In other words, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means in a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), first, a special effect performed using the random number for determination of success / failure among the acquired random numbers It is determined whether or not the result of the determination process is a win, in other words, whether the acquired random number for determining whether or not it belongs is a value belonging to the low-accuracy random number group or the high-accuracy random number group (special hit determination means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-accuracy random number group (the result of the special effect determination process is a win), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start in which the winning per special effect is won) Without waiting for the (game) to be put on hold, a specific display mode (a character appears on the bag) that is different from the normal display mode (display mode only for the heel) for the suspend display corresponding to the game. It is possible to execute display control in a form in which (display mode) appears (highly accurate lottery prior suggestion means). As a result, a winning start game in which a winning / failing determination process (a big winning lottery within a highly-probable random number group such as a quarter in this embodiment) is performed with a probability higher than the winning probability determined in the winning determination table. Is produced as if it is in a hold state (advantageous hold effect).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value belongs to the low-accuracy random number group (the result of the special effect determination process is lost), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the result of the special effect determination is determined to be a hit) The display control is performed in such a way that the normal display mode (display mode of only the heel) appears for the hold display corresponding to the game without waiting for the winning start game) to be put on hold. As if the winning start game in which the winning / failing determination process (the big winning lottery in the low probability random number group) is performed with a probability lower than the winning probability determined in the above winning determination table is put on hold Effect (unpriced hold effect) will be realized.

  Therefore, the monotonous effect that only the effect based on the predetermined winning probability (the winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value to the loss value stored in the hit determination table of Table 1) continues endlessly is eliminated. As a result, the variation in the execution of the effect can be widened by the holding effect (the disadvantaged holding effect, the advantageous holding effect) based on at least two pseudo winning probabilities. It becomes like this. In addition, since such a hold effect (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is performed prior to the winning start game (win / no-go determination process), it is advantageous as a disadvantaged hold effect. It is possible to preliminarily suggest to the player whether the determination process is to be performed or not. Then, when it is suggested that the success / failure determination process is performed under the favored holding effect, the player can play a game with strong expectation that the success / failure determination process is performed. Become.

  Note that, according to the above, the special effect determination table 4908 includes a part of the jackpot value (307 in the present embodiment) and a part of the loss value (197 to 199 in the present embodiment) stored in the hit determination table 4906. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all of the jackpot values stored in the hit determination table 4906 (corresponding to 3 and 307 in this embodiment) are stored as the special effect hit values. It may be stored so as to be discriminated. In other words, when a random number for determination of success / failure that is determined to be a win in the determination process is acquired, it is always determined to be a win in the special effect determination process. Therefore, at this time, for example, the peripheral control board 4140 may perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the hold-related effect with a predetermined probability. Furthermore, even if a random number for determining whether or not to be determined is obtained in the determination process, if the hold-related effect is performed with a predetermined probability, the above-described hold-related effect and the player are performed. It is possible to perform a similar hold-related effect as seen from the above.

  By the way, in many cases, the winning probability that the jackpot is won in the above-described success / failure determination process is often a low probability such as “1/300”, for example. It seems difficult to get. For this reason, if the above-described hold display (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is simply performed, only the disadvantaged hold effect will always appear, thereby reversing the gaming interest. It may also decrease. In order to avoid such disadvantages, it may be possible to lower the degree of advantage of the above-mentioned on-holding effect and set it so that the player hardly feels the degree of disadvantage of the on-holding effect, In this case, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost. In addition, it may be possible to hold the display with a specific display mode even when a random number value of the low-accuracy random number group is acquired, but in this case as well, only the amount of appearance of the specific display mode is increased. The degree of expectation when the specific display mode is performed is lowered, and eventually, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost.

  In this regard, in this embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state), the special effect determination process is indeed performed even though it is not determined that the result of the special effect determination process is correct. The fake display control can be executed in such a way that a hold display as if the result of the above is a hit appears as a hold related effect.

  In addition, when the fake display control is executed, while the hold display by the fake display control is extinguished (that is, before the determination processing (special symbol variation display)), Change control for changing the display form from the specific display form (display form in which a character appears on the heel) to the normal display form (display form of only the heel) is further executable (false hold display) Exposure effect control means).

  That is, in this case, even when the random number value of the low probability random number group is acquired, it is temporarily displayed with the specific display mode, so that it is actually digested after the winning start game is put on hold. In the meantime, it becomes possible to avoid having to keep watching the above-mentioned disadvantaged holding effect for a long time. In addition, while the hold display having a specific display mode appears with a high probability, the display mode is the normal display mode at the time when the entrance start game in the hold state is actually digested. Since the display has been changed to the display mode (display mode only for heels) and is displayed on hold, the winning start is digested in correspondence with the hold display having a specific display mode (display mode in which a character appears on the heel) Expectations for games are less likely to be adversely affected.

  Furthermore, for the player, the hold display having the specific display mode (display mode in which a character appears on the bowl) is maintained until the winning start game that is displayed on hold is actually consumed. It is possible to provide an effect element such as whether or not the display is changed to the normal display mode (display mode only with a bag) during the period in which the game is in the hold state. As a result, the player can enjoy not only the symbol variation effects at the current stage, but also a wider range of effects including the winning start game that is on hold. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment in situations where digestion does not progress. In addition, when the hold display with the specific display mode is maintained until the winning start game displayed on hold is actually consumed, the winning probability determined in the hit determination table shown in Table 1 It will function as an effect as if a winning start game in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in the high-precision random number group) is performed is started, and the winning start game displayed on hold is displayed. If the hold display with the above specific display mode is not maintained until it is actually digested, the jackpot lottery (low low) with a lower probability than the winning probability determined in the hit determination table shown in Table 1 It will function as an effect as if a winning start game in which a jackpot lottery in a certain random number group) is started.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state, when a hold-related effect is displayed, it is determined whether or not to hold display in a special hold display mode. This special hold display mode has a plurality of types of display forms (black character, red character, white character), and these multiple types of display forms are reliable because the result of the special effect determination process is a hit. The reliability with different degrees is associated. For example, the reliability that the result of the special effect determination process is successful is 0% for a black character, 50% for a red character, and 100% for a white character.

  When it is determined that the special hold display mode is used for the hold display, the specific display form (black character) having a low reliability of the plurality of display forms is not dependent on the result of the special effect determination process. ) To enable display control to be displayed as a hold related effect (low reliability hold forced display control means).

  In this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed after the specific display form with low reliability of the plurality of display forms is temporarily displayed on hold and before the hold display is extinguished by the hold digest status expression unit. The display form corresponding to the reliability that the result of the special effect determination process of the plurality of types of display forms is a win based on the result of the special effect determination process. It is possible to execute change control that promotes and changes the form (forced display release control means). That is, a specific display mode with a low reliability of the plurality of types of display modes is temporarily displayed on hold, but before the hold display is digested (while being held on display on the liquid crystal display device 1400). Then, the display form is promoted and changed to a display form commensurate with the reliability that the result of the special effect determination process is the winning among the plurality of types of display forms.

  In this case, when the display is performed in a special hold display mode, the specific display form with low reliability (black character) will appear once, but this initial stage (specific display with low reliability). Contrary to the low reliability thus suggested at the time of appearance of the form, the success / failure determination process (within the high probability random number group) has a higher probability than the winning probability determined by the hit determination table of Table 1. The possibility that the winning start game in which the jackpot lottery) is put on hold remains sufficiently. As described above, regardless of whether the random number value of the high-accuracy random number group or the low-accuracy random number group was acquired, only the specific on-hold display (unfavorable on-hold effect) with low reliability described above appears. Thus, when a specific on-hold display with low reliability appears, it is avoided that only the low reliability is emphasized, and the entertainment attraction is reduced when the on-hold display appears. This can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, after a specific on-hold display with a low degree of reliability (disadvantaged on-hold effect) appears, until the winning start game corresponding to the on-hold display is consumed, the display form is a special effect. It is possible to provide the player with an effect element such as whether or not the display mode (red character or white character) is promoted and changed to a highly reliable display mode in which the result of the determination process is a hit. In this way, only specific hold display with low reliability (deferred hold effect) is made to appear first, and thereafter only the chance of whether a more reliable display form appears. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the winning start game is on hold. In addition, from the player's side, not only the symbol variation effect that is being performed at the present stage as the winning start game is digested, but also a wider range of effects including the winning start game that is on hold. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in a situation where the number of reservations is large and the reservation is difficult to proceed.

Furthermore, even if the chance to be given to the player (chance to be promoted to a highly reliable display format) fails while the winning start game is in a pending state, When the hold is released and digested, the chance to win the jackpot is given again. In this way, for one winning start game,
A display mode with higher reliability after a specific reserved display (black character) with low reliability whose result of the special effect determination process is successful once appears and then disappears. The first chance of whether or not a big win lottery in the high-precision random number group can be expected after being promoted and changed to a red character or a white character.
・ Although the chance at the first stage has failed, the second chance at whether or not the jackpot will be won in the jackpot lottery in the low probability random number group.
When the above-mentioned winning start game is digested without the promotion change of the first on-hold display (specific on-hold display with low reliability) due to the game structure that gives the player a two-stage chance This can also be suitably maintained for the game entertainment.

  In addition, a low-probability gaming state in which only a jackpot lottery in the low-accuracy random number group is easily performed without a hold display associated with a high reliability level (the probability of a jackpot is a low probability such as 1/300) In the gaming state), in view of the fact that the winning expectation to the jackpot is not so much, on the condition that it is controlled to the short gaming state when it is easy to enter the gaming ball to the second starting port 2002 , A control that eliminates the execution of a reach production (symbol fluctuation that requires a relatively long time) that is a big hit with a reach form (a control to digest a winning start game that has been put on hold for a short time) (Specific state variation control means).

  According to such control, although it is obvious that it is difficult to have an expectation for the symbol variation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, “a new hold display is likely to appear in the short-time gaming state. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, whether or not a hold display having the display form with high reliability appears newly (whether or not a random value belonging to the high-accuracy random number group is newly acquired) is held. Appears as a production.

  That is, according to such a continuous hold display (holding effect) realized by performing control that does not have any expectation in the symbol effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (short-term digestion of the winning start game), Due to the jackpot probability that is often set to be low, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste without relying on the symbol production that is unlikely to have high expectations. In addition, after it has been suggested through the holding effect that a random number value belonging to the highly probable random number group (that is, a random value determined to be a hit in the special effect determining process) is obtained, Winning probability with the possibility of being a random number value (random number value determined to be lost in the special effect determination process) excluded, that is, a jackpot with a higher probability than the winning probability determined in the hit determination table of Table 1 Processing as if lottery (a jackpot lottery in the high-precision random number group) is performed is realized. And such a high expectation degree is expressed as a high expectation symbol variation effect in the effect display unit, so that the player's game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Further, in the special game state in which the ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value stored in the hit determination table of Table 1 is higher than the low-probability game state, among the winning start games that are put on hold The winning start games that are in the hold state are sequentially digested while making the player aware of which winning start game is likely to end the special gaming state and be controlled to the low probability gaming state. I try to do it.

  In other words, in the case of the hold display in the special game state, if the big win is won in the winning determination process in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, the low-probability game state ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether the short-time gaming state) or the highly probable gaming state is generated based on the design random number (winning type determination random number) among the random numbers obtained by the random number obtaining means. Yes. Then, when it is determined that the low probability gaming state occurs and when it is determined that the special gaming state occurs, it is possible to execute display control in which the display modes related to each other's hold display are easily different ( Specific state prior suggestion means).

  According to such control, even if the special game state is simply maintained without winning a big win, for example, a low-probability game state (normal game state, short-time game state) is generated. As long as there is at least one on-hold display (ignited bomb) that is likely to be displayed, the player will be actively exposed to the risk of being demoted to a low-probability gaming state over multiple symbol variations. It will function as a disadvantageous production mode to be conscious. On the other hand, for example, as long as no hold display with a high probability of generating a low probability gaming state is displayed and only a hold display with a high probability of generating a special gaming state appears, It functions as an advantageous effect mode in which a person is positively aware that the special game state is likely to be continued over a plurality of symbol variations. That is, in this case, in the special game state, the mode transition between a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage is performed even though no control processing is internally performed for the player. An impression can be given as if the production is being performed. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest in a special gaming state in which it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension by setting a high probability of winning the jackpot in the success / failure determination process.

  Furthermore, in the case of special effects related to holding, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, the expected number of winning balls to be paid out in the jackpot game corresponding to this Whether the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value is determined based on a design random number (prize ball expected value determination random number) among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Then, when it is determined that the expected value of the number of prize balls is less than a predetermined value and when it is determined that the expected value of the number of prize balls is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, It is possible to execute display control that makes it easy to differ (predictive means for prize ball expected value in advance).

  According to such control, even if there is a situation in which the above-mentioned special gaming state is simply maintained without winning a jackpot, for example, the expected number of winning balls that do not match the winning probability of the jackpot ( At least one on-hold display (display mode with a bomb ignited on top of the cage) with a high probability of generating a jackpot game (for example, a short open jackpot game) that can be obtained only (the number of prize balls less than a predetermined value) is displayed. As long as the player is in a state, the player will function as an unfavorable game mode in which he / she actively becomes aware of the risk of playing a big hit game, which is regarded as an unfavorable number of winning balls over multiple symbol variations. .

  On the other hand, for example, an on-hold display with a high probability of generating a jackpot game (for example, a short open jackpot game) in which only the expected number of winning balls (the number of winning balls less than a predetermined value) that does not match the winning probability of the jackpot can be obtained. Is not displayed, and there is a high probability of generating a jackpot game (for example, a long open jackpot game) in which the expected number of winning balls (the number of winning balls equal to or greater than the predetermined value) corresponding to the winning probability of the jackpot is obtained. As long as only the display (the display mode of the heel only) appears, the player receives a jackpot game (for example, a short open jackpot game) that has been awarded an unfavorable number of winning balls over multiple symbol variations. It will function as an advantageous game mode that actively recognizes that there is an advantageous game state in which the risk of appearing balls is eliminated. That is, in this case, in the special game state, the player can be given an impression as if the game mode transition effect is being performed among a plurality of game modes having different degrees of advantage. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest in a special gaming state in which it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension by setting a high probability of winning the jackpot.

  The following independent technical ideas can be extracted based on the embodiment described above.

(Technical thought 1)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
First winning random number storage means stored so that the winning determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means can be classified into either a loss value or a jackpot value;
A jackpot lottery is performed for classifying and determining the winning determination random number as either the lost value or the jackpot value based on the first winning random number storage means, and when the jackpot value is determined as the jackpot value, the player A game control means capable of executing a winning start game in which a jackpot game for granting a privilege is further performed;
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the game hold that waits and holds the winning start game by the game control means according to the winning determination random number among the acquired random numbers until the execution condition is satisfied Means,
In order to enable the player to recognize the holding status of the winning start game by the game holding means, a holding display corresponding to each of the winning start games that are put on hold appears on each predetermined display section. Hold display control means for performing display control for the hold display in a form,
The jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be discriminated as special hit values, respectively, and the jackpot value that can be discriminated is determined. A ratio to the lost value is a second winning random number storage means that is set higher than a ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means;
Prior to the winning start game being performed by the game control means, the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided to the winning start game while the winning start game is put on hold is the special winning value. A special hit determination means for performing a special determination process for determining that the special win is won when it is determined that the special hit value is determined;
With
The hold display control means includes
When the winning start game held by the game holding means is digested when the winning start game execution condition is satisfied, the hold display corresponding to the winning start game to be consumed disappears from the predetermined display unit. A normal display mode for the hold display corresponding to the winning start game in which the special win is won based on the determination that the special win is won in the special determination process. In the winning start game corresponding to the hold display in which the specific display mode appears, the ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value is made possible by executing display control in a specific display mode different from When the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the jackpot winning probability determined by High-predictive lottery prior suggestion means to be pre-suggested in the predetermined display section, and the specific display mode even though it is not determined that the special winning is won in the special determination process On the other hand, when the false display control is executed, the hold display by the false display control is changed to the hold digest display control means. An exposure effect control capable of further executing change control for changing the display form from the specific display form to the normal display form while appearing on the predetermined display unit before being extinguished by A gaming machine comprising means.

  That is, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, first, the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified by the first winning random number storage means can be determined as special hit values, respectively. The ratio of the jackpot value that can be made to the lost value is a second winning set that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means to the lose value. Random number storage means was provided.

  Thereby, a high-accuracy random number group (the first random number group) which is higher than the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the above-mentioned loss value (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot) is preferentially treated. 2 random number values stored in the winning random number storage means). In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. (Random values that are not registered as special winning values in the second winning random number storage means among the jackpot values and loss values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means) are naturally created. (A pair relationship with the high-precision random number group).

  That is, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, first, it is determined whether the winning determination random number of the random numbers belongs to the low-accuracy random number group or the high-accuracy random number group ( Special hit judgment means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-precision random number group (special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special winning is won) is suspended and digested. The first winning random number memory can be stored by enabling display control in a form in which a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game without waiting for An effect (advantageous) as if the winning start game in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in a high-precision random number group) is held with a probability higher than the winning probability determined by means is put on hold (On hold production) was made to appear.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value belongs to the low probability random number group (a value not corresponding to the special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special winning is won) The display control is performed in such a way that a normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game without waiting for the game to be put on hold.

  Therefore, it is monotonous that only an effect based on a predetermined winning probability (a winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the loss value) is endless. The production will be canceled, and the variation of the production will be widened by holding the production based on at least two pseudo winning probabilities (the disadvantaged holding production and the advantageous holding production). Will be able to. However, it is not always necessary to perform the holding effect according to the present invention when the special winning is won, for example, when the normal holding display appears with a predetermined probability even when the special winning is won. In the jackpot lottery when the normal hold display appears, all the random numbers that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means can be targeted. In this case, in the second winning random number storage means, part of the jackpot value and the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means can be respectively determined as special winning values. If there is, the jackpot value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means may be all discriminable as the special hit value.

  In addition, since such a hold effect (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is performed prior to the winning start game, the disadvantageous hold effect and the advantageous hold effect It is possible to preliminarily suggest to the player under which the winning determination process is performed. When it is suggested that the winning determination process is performed under the favored holding effect, the player can play with a strong expectation that the winning determination process is performed. Become.

  However, the winning probability that the jackpot is won in the winning determination process is often a low probability such as “1/300”, for example. It seems difficult to get. For this reason, if the above-described hold display (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is simply performed, only the disadvantaged hold effect will always appear, thereby reversing the gaming interest. It may also decrease. In order to avoid such disadvantages, it may be possible to lower the degree of advantage of the above-mentioned on-holding effect and set it so that the player hardly feels the degree of disadvantage of the on-holding effect, In this case, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost. In addition, it may be possible to hold the display with a specific display mode even when a random number value of the low-accuracy random number group is acquired, but in this case as well, only the amount of appearance of the specific display mode is increased. The degree of expectation when the specific display mode is performed is lowered, and eventually, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost.

  In this regard, in the above-described configuration, the hold display having the specific display mode appears on the predetermined display unit even though it is not determined that the special win is won in the special determination process. While the display control can be executed, when the false display control is executed, the hold display by the false display control appears on the predetermined display unit before it is extinguished by the hold digest display control means. In the meantime, change control for changing the display form from the specific display form to the normal display form is further executable (exposure effect control means).

  That is, in this case, even when the random number value of the low probability random number group is acquired, it is temporarily displayed with the specific display mode, so that it is actually digested after the winning start game is put on hold. In the meantime, it is possible to avoid having to keep watching the disadvantaged holding effect (holding display in the low probability random number group) for a long time. In addition, while the on-hold display having a specific display mode appears with a high probability in this way, at the time when the winning start game in the on-hold state is actually digested, the display mode is the normal display mode. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the expectation for the winning start game that is digested corresponding to the hold display having a specific display mode is less likely to be adversely affected.

  Furthermore, for the player, is the hold display (hold display in the high-precision random number group) maintained with the specific display mode until the winning start game that is displayed on hold is actually consumed? An effect element such as (whether or not the display is changed to the normal display mode) can be provided in a period in which the game is in a hold state. As a result, the player can enjoy not only the symbol variation effects at the current stage, but also a wider range of effects including the winning start game that is on hold. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment in situations where digestion does not progress. In addition, when the hold display having the specific display mode is maintained until the winning start game displayed on hold is actually consumed, the winning probability determined by the first winning random number storage means is determined. It will function as an effect as if a winning start game in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in the high-precision random number group) is performed is started, and the winning start game displayed on hold is displayed. If the hold display having the specific display mode is not maintained until it is actually digested, the jackpot lottery (low low) with a probability lower than the winning probability determined by the first winning random number storage means It will function as an effect as if a winning start game in which a jackpot lottery in a certain random number group) is performed is started. Such a pseudo variation of the winning probability and the aspect related to the above-described hold display can be combined to favorably maintain the game entertainment.

(Technical thought 2)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
First winning random number storage means stored so that the winning determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means can be classified into either a loss value or a jackpot value;
A jackpot lottery is performed for classifying and determining the winning determination random number as either the lost value or the jackpot value based on the first winning random number storage means, and when the jackpot value is determined as the jackpot value, the player A game control means capable of executing a winning start game in which a jackpot game for granting a privilege is further performed;
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the game hold that waits and holds the winning start game by the game control means according to the winning determination random number among the acquired random numbers until the execution condition is satisfied Means,
In order to enable the player to recognize the holding status of the winning start game by the game holding means, a holding display corresponding to each of the winning start games that are put on hold appears on each predetermined display section. Hold display control means for performing display control for the hold display in a form,
The jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be discriminated as special hit values, respectively, and the jackpot value that can be discriminated is determined. A ratio to the lost value is a second winning random number storage means that is set higher than a ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means;
Prior to the winning start game being performed by the game control means, the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided to the winning start game while the winning start game is put on hold is the special winning value. A special hit determination means for performing a special determination process for determining that the special win is won when it is determined that the special hit value is determined;
With
The hold display control means includes
When the winning start game held by the game holding means is digested when the winning start game execution condition is satisfied, the hold display corresponding to the winning start game to be consumed disappears from the predetermined display unit. Holding display means for holding, and having a plurality of display forms each associated with a different degree of reliability as the degree of reliability in which the special winning is won, and one of these display forms is adopted and displayed on hold. A special display mode storing means for storing a special display mode, and when displaying a special display in the special display mode, among the display types of the plurality of types, regardless of the result of the winning per special Low reliability display control means capable of holding display with a specific display form with low reliability, and the plurality of types of display forms by the low reliability display control means When the hold display is performed with a specific display form with low reliability of the Low-reliability display cancellation control means capable of executing a change control for promoting and changing the display form to a display form corresponding to the result of the special hit among the plurality of types of display forms Gaming machine.

  That is, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, first, the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified by the first winning random number storage means can be determined as special hit values, respectively. The ratio of the jackpot value that can be made to the lost value is a second winning set that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means to the lose value. Random number storage means was provided.

  Thereby, a high-accuracy random number group (the first random number group) which is higher than the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the above-mentioned loss value (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot) is preferentially treated. 2 random number values stored in the winning random number storage means). In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. (Random values that are not registered as special winning values in the second winning random number storage means among the jackpot values and loss values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means) are naturally created. (A pair relationship with the high-precision random number group).

  That is, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, first, it is determined whether the winning determination random number of the random numbers belongs to the low-accuracy random number group or the high-accuracy random number group ( Special hit judgment means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-accuracy random number group (special hit value), for example, a pending display in which a high reliability is associated with the reliability that the special hit is won is displayed. If the display control is executed, the jackpot lottery (high) with a higher probability than the winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value is determined. An effect as if the winning start game in which a jackpot lottery in a certain random number group is held is put on hold (advantageous hold effect) is realized.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value belongs to the low-accuracy random number group (a value that does not correspond to the special hit value), for example, a hold with a low reliability associated with the reliability that the special hit is won If display control is performed in the form of display, the winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value is lower than the winning probability. It is also possible to realize an effect (a disadvantaged hold effect) as if the winning start game in which the big win lottery (the big win lottery in the low probability random number group) is held is put on hold.

  Therefore, it is monotonous that only an effect based on a predetermined winning probability (a winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the loss value) is endless. The production will be canceled, and the variation of the production will be widened by holding the production based on at least two pseudo winning probabilities (the disadvantaged holding production and the advantageous holding production). Will be able to. However, it is not always necessary to perform the holding effect according to the present invention when the special win is won, for example, when the normal hold display appears with a predetermined probability even when the special win is won. In the jackpot lottery when the normal hold display appears, all random numbers that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be targeted. In this case, in the second winning random number storage means, part of the jackpot value and the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means can be respectively determined as special winning values. If there is, the jackpot value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means may be all discriminable as the special hit value.

  In addition, since such a holding effect (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is performed prior to the winning start game, the disadvantageous holding effect and the advantageous holding effect It is possible to preliminarily suggest to the player under which the winning determination process is started. When it is suggested that the winning determination process is performed under the favored holding effect, the player can play with a strong expectation that the winning determination process is performed. Become.

  However, the winning probability that the jackpot is won in the winning determination process is often a low probability such as “1/300”, for example. It seems difficult to get. For this reason, if the above-described hold display (a disadvantaged game effect, an advantageous game effect) is simply performed, the disadvantaged hold effect (a hold display associated with a low reliability) is always provided. As a result, the entertainment interests of the game may decline. In order to avoid such disadvantages, it may be possible to lower the degree of advantage of the above-mentioned on-holding effect and set it so that the player hardly feels the degree of disadvantage of the on-holding effect, In this case, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost. In addition, it may be possible to hold the display with a specific display mode even when a random number value of the low-accuracy random number group is acquired, but in this case as well, only the amount of appearance of the specific display mode is increased. The degree of expectation when the specific display mode is performed is lowered, and eventually, the meaning as the above-described holding effect (holding effect based on two pseudo winning probabilities) is lost.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, when the hold display is performed in the special hold display mode, the hold is performed with the specific display form having the low reliability among the plurality of display forms regardless of the result of the special hit. Display is made possible (low reliability display control means). And after the specific display form with low reliability of the plurality of display forms is temporarily displayed in this way, the predetermined display before the reserved display is extinguished by the reserved digest display control means. While appearing on the display unit, the display mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the reliability in which the special hit among the plurality of display modes is won based on the result of the special hit. Change control for promotion change can be executed (low reliability display release control means).

  That is, in this case, when the special hold display is performed, the specific display form with low reliability will appear once, but at this initial stage (when the specific display form with low reliability appears), Contrary to the suggested low reliability, the jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery in the high-precision random number group) is performed with a higher probability than the winning probability determined by the first winning random number storage means. There is a sufficient possibility that the winning start game will be put on hold. As described above, regardless of whether the random number value of the high-accuracy random number group or the low-accuracy random number group was acquired, only the specific on-hold display (unfavorable on-hold effect) with low reliability described above appears. Thus, when a specific on-hold display with low reliability appears, it is avoided that only the low reliability is emphasized, and the entertainment attraction is reduced when the on-hold display appears. This can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, after a specific on-hold display with low reliability (unfavorable on-hold effect) appears in this way, until the winning start game corresponding to the on-hold display is exhausted, the display form is a special hit. It is possible to provide the player with a production element such as whether or not the player is promoted and changed to a highly reliable display form. In this way, only specific hold display with low reliability (deferred hold effect) is made to appear first, and thereafter only the chance of whether a more reliable display form appears. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the winning start game is on hold. In addition, from the player's side, not only the symbol variation effect that is being performed at the present stage as the winning start game is digested, but also a wider range of effects including the winning start game that is on hold. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in a situation where the number of reservations is large and the reservation is difficult to proceed.

Furthermore, even if the chance to be given to the player (chance to be promoted to a highly reliable display format) fails while the winning start game is in a pending state, When the hold is released and digested, the chance to win the jackpot is given again. In this way, for one winning start game,
・ Once the specific hold display with low reliability that has been won for each performance has appeared once, it is promoted to a display form with higher reliability until the hold display disappears, and the above-mentioned high-accuracy random number First chance to see if you can expect a big win in the group.
・ Although the chance at the first stage has failed, the second chance at whether or not the jackpot will be won in the jackpot lottery in the low probability random number group.
When the above-mentioned winning start game is digested without the promotion change of the first on-hold display (specific on-hold display with low reliability) due to the game structure that gives the player a two-stage chance This can also be suitably maintained for the game entertainment.

(Technical thought 3)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
First winning random number storage means stored so that the winning determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means can be classified into either a loss value or a jackpot value;
A jackpot lottery for classifying and determining the winning determination random number as either the lost value or the jackpot value based on the first winning random number storage means is performed, and when the jackpot value is classified and determined as the jackpot value, A game control means capable of executing a winning start game in which a jackpot game that gives a privilege to the player as being elected is further performed;
When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery by the game control means, based on the winning type determination random number of the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the jackpot game according to the jackpot, a low-probability gaming state And a state control means that can generate either a high-probability gaming state that makes it easier to win a jackpot than the low-probability gaming state,
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the game hold that waits and holds the winning start game by the game control means according to the winning determination random number among the acquired random numbers until the execution condition is satisfied Means,
In order to enable the player to recognize the holding status of the winning start game by the game holding means, a holding display corresponding to each of the winning start games that are put on hold appears on each predetermined display section. Hold display control means for performing display control for the hold display in a form,
The jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be discriminated as special hit values, respectively, and the jackpot value that can be discriminated is determined. A ratio to the lost value is a second winning random number storage means that is set higher than a ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means;
Prior to the winning start game being performed by the game control means, the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided to the winning start game while the winning start game is put on hold is the special winning value. A special hit determination means for performing a special determination process for determining that the special win is won when it is determined that the special hit value is determined;
With
The hold display control means includes
In performing the holding display, it is determined whether or not a special winning is won in the special determination process based on a winning determination random number among random numbers provided to a winning start game corresponding to the holding display, and When it is determined that the special win is won, a high-precision lottery prior suggestion means capable of executing display control in a form in which a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display, and the hold display In doing so, if a big win is won in the big win lottery in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, which of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will occur after the corresponding big win game? Is determined based on the winning type determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and the low probability gaming state occurs Specific state prior suggestion means capable of executing display control that makes it easy for the display mode of each hold display to be different between when it is determined and when it is determined that the highly probable gaming state occurs. When the game state is controlled, the display control by the high-precision lottery prior suggestion means can be executed so that the expectation when the winning start game is put on hold is easily maintained. On the other hand, when controlled to the highly probable gaming state, any one of the winning start games in the on-hold state is enabled by enabling display control by the specific state prior suggestion means In this way, the winning start games in the hold state are sequentially digested while making the player aware that the high probability game state is likely to end and the low probability game state is likely to be controlled. Game machine and said.

  That is, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, first, the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified by the first winning random number storage means can be determined as special hit values, respectively. The ratio of the jackpot value that can be made to the lost value is a second winning set that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means to the lose value. Random number storage means was provided.

  Thereby, a high-accuracy random number group (the first random number group) which is higher than the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the above-mentioned loss value (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot) is preferentially treated. 2 random number values stored in the winning random number storage means). In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. (Random values that are not registered as special winning values in the second winning random number storage means among the jackpot values and loss values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means) are naturally created. (A pair relationship with the high-precision random number group).

  In this regard, in the above-described configuration, in the low-probability gaming state that is set so that the jackpot winning probability determined by the first winning random number storage means is low, There is an effect that makes the player aware of the possibility that some of them have high expectations for jackpots.

  That is, in the low probability gaming state, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, first, the winning determination random number among the random numbers is a value belonging to either the low probability random number group or the high probability random number group. (Special hit judging means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-precision random number group (special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special winning is won) is suspended and digested. The display control can be executed in such a way that a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game without waiting for the game (high-precision lottery prior suggestion means). As a result, even if it is difficult to win the jackpot (low-probability gaming state), when a lot of winning start games are put on hold, the first winning random number storage means through such display control. An effect as if the winning start game in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in a high-precision random number group) is held with a higher probability than the determined winning probability is put on hold (advantaged hold effect) ) Easily appear, and in this case, the expectation in the low-probability gaming state can be sustained over a plurality of symbol variations.

  If it is determined that the value belongs to the low-accuracy random number group (a value not corresponding to the special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special win is won) is held. Without waiting for digestion, display control is performed in a form in which a normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game (highly accurate lottery prior suggestion means). However, it is not always necessary to perform the holding effect according to the present invention when the special win is won, for example, when the normal hold display appears with a predetermined probability even when the special win is won. In the jackpot lottery when the normal hold display appears, all random numbers that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be targeted. In this case, in the second winning random number storage means, part of the jackpot value and the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means can be respectively determined as special winning values. If there is, the jackpot value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means may be all discriminable as the special hit value.

  That is, in this case, only an effect based on a predetermined winning probability (a winning probability determined by a ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value) is continued endlessly. Monotonous production will be eliminated. For this reason, while in the low-probability gaming state in which one low winning probability is determined by the first winning random number storage means, the holding effect (disadvantage) based on at least two pseudo winning probabilities The reserved execution effect and the advantageous hold effect) can give variations in the execution of the effect.

  Further, in the above configuration, in the high probability gaming state in which the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the loss value is higher than the low probability gaming state, the state is put on hold. Among the winning start games, the player is conscious of whether or not the winning game is likely to end the high probability gaming state and be controlled to the low probability gaming state. A certain winning start game is gradually digested.

  In other words, when the hold display in the high-probability game state, if the big win is won in the big win lottery in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, the low-probability game state and the high high after the corresponding jackpot game Which of the probable gaming states occurs is determined based on the winning type determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Then, it is possible to execute display control in which the display mode for the hold display is easily different between when it is determined that the low probability gaming state occurs and when it is determined that the high probability gaming state occurs. (Specific state prior suggestion means).

  According to such control, even if the high-probability gaming state is simply maintained without winning a jackpot, for example, a hold display with a high probability of generating a low-probability gaming state is 1 As long as the player is in one of the displayed states, the player functions as a demoted game mode in which the player is actively aware of the risk of demoting to a low-probability gaming state over multiple symbol variations. On the other hand, for example, as long as no hold display with a high probability of generating a low-probability gaming state is displayed, but only a hold display with a high probability of generating a high-probability gaming state is displayed, The player functions as a continuous game mode in which the player is positively aware that the highly probable gaming state is likely to be continued over a plurality of symbol variations. That is, in this case, in the high-probability gaming state, the game mode transition between a plurality of on-hold gaming modes having different continuation rates is performed for the player even though the continuation rate of the gaming state is constant. It is possible to give an impression as if the production is being performed, and by this, the probability of winning the jackpot is set high, so that it is suitable for gaming entertainment in a highly accurate gaming state where it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension Can be maintained.

(Technical thought 4)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
First winning random number storage means stored so that the winning determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means can be classified into either a loss value or a jackpot value;
A jackpot lottery for classifying and determining the winning determination random number as either the lost value or the jackpot value based on the first winning random number storage means is performed, and when the jackpot value is classified and determined as the jackpot value, A game control means capable of executing a winning start game in which a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be awarded to the player as being won;
When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery by the game control means, the jackpot game by the game control means according to the jackpot is determined based on a winning ball expected value determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Winning ball expected value determining means for determining an expected value of the number of winning balls that can be given to the player at
When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery by the game control means, based on the winning type determination random number of the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the jackpot game according to the jackpot, a low-probability gaming state And a state control means that can generate either a high-probability gaming state that makes it easier to win a jackpot than the low-probability gaming state,
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the game hold that waits and holds the winning start game by the game control means according to the winning determination random number among the acquired random numbers until the execution condition is satisfied Means,
In order to enable the player to recognize the holding status of the winning start game by the game holding means, a holding display corresponding to each of the winning start games that are put on hold appears on each predetermined display section. Hold display control means for performing display control for the hold display in a form,
The jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be discriminated as special hit values, respectively, and the jackpot value that can be discriminated is determined. A ratio to the lost value is a second winning random number storage means that is set higher than a ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means;
Prior to the winning start game being performed by the game control means, the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided to the winning start game while the winning start game is put on hold is the special winning value. A special hit determination means for performing a special determination process for determining that the special win is won when it is determined that the special hit value is determined;
With
The hold display control means includes
In performing the holding display, it is determined whether or not a special winning is won in the special determination process based on a winning determination random number among random numbers provided to a winning start game corresponding to the holding display, and When it is determined that the special win is won, a high-precision lottery prior suggestion means capable of executing display control in a form in which a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display, and the hold display In doing so, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, whether or not the expected value of the number of winning balls to be paid out in the jackpot game according to this is a predetermined value or more Judgment is made based on a winning ball expected value determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means, and the expected value of the winning ball number is less than a predetermined value. The prize ball expected value in advance can be controlled so that the display mode for each holding display is easily different between when it is determined that the expected value of the number of winning balls is greater than a predetermined value. When the low probability game state is controlled, the display control by the high probability lottery prior suggestion means can be executed, so that the expectation for the winning start game can be easily maintained. On the other hand, when being controlled to the highly probable gaming state, the display control by the prize ball expected value prior suggestion means is made executable so that the winning start game in the pending state The winning start games that have been put on hold are digested sequentially while making the player aware of which winning start game is likely to have a big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player. Game machine to be.

  That is, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, first, the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified by the first winning random number storage means can be determined as special hit values, respectively. The ratio of the jackpot value that can be made to the lost value is a second winning set that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means to the lose value. Random number storage means was provided.

  Thereby, a high-accuracy random number group (the first random number group) which is higher than the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the above-mentioned loss value (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot) is preferentially treated. 2 random number values stored in the winning random number storage means). In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. (Random values that are not registered as special winning values in the second winning random number storage means among the jackpot values and loss values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means) are naturally created. (A pair relationship with the high-precision random number group).

  In this regard, in the above-described configuration, in the low-probability gaming state that is set so that the jackpot winning probability determined by the first winning random number storage means is low, There is an effect that makes the player aware of the possibility that some of them have high expectations for jackpots.

  That is, in the low probability gaming state, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, first, the winning determination random number among the random numbers is a value belonging to either the low probability random number group or the high probability random number group. (Special hit judging means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-precision random number group (special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special winning is won) is suspended and digested. The display control can be executed in such a way that a specific display mode different from the normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game without waiting for the game (high-precision lottery prior suggestion means). As a result, even if it is difficult to win the jackpot (low-probability gaming state), when a lot of winning start games are put on hold, the first winning random number storage means through such display control. An effect as if the winning start game in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in a high-precision random number group) is held with a higher probability than the determined winning probability is put on hold (advantaged hold effect) ) Easily appear, and in this case, the expectation in the low-probability gaming state can be sustained over a plurality of symbol variations.

  If it is determined that the value belongs to the low-accuracy random number group (a value not corresponding to the special winning value), the winning start game based on the acquired random number (the winning start game in which the special win is won) is held. Without waiting for digestion, display control is performed in a form in which a normal display mode appears for the hold display corresponding to the game (highly accurate lottery prior suggestion means). However, it is not always necessary to perform the holding effect according to the present invention when the special win is won, for example, when the normal hold display appears with a predetermined probability even when the special win is won. In the jackpot lottery when the normal hold display appears, all random numbers that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be targeted. In this case, in the second winning random number storage means, part of the jackpot value and the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means can be respectively determined as special winning values. If there is, the jackpot value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means may be all discriminable as the special hit value.

  That is, in this case, only an effect based on a predetermined winning probability (a winning probability determined by a ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value) is continued endlessly. Monotonous production will be eliminated. For this reason, while in the low-probability gaming state in which one low winning probability is determined by the first winning random number storage means, the holding effect (disadvantage) based on at least two pseudo winning probabilities The reserved execution effect and the advantageous hold effect) can give variations in the execution of the effect.

  Further, in the above configuration, in the high probability gaming state in which the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the loss value is higher than the low probability gaming state, the state is put on hold. There is a possibility that a jackpot game that is disadvantageous for the player (a jackpot game where only the expected number of winning balls that does not match the winning probability of the jackpot) can be played in any of the winning start games The winning start games that are in the hold state are sequentially digested while making the player aware of whether it is high.

  In other words, in the hold display in the high-probability gaming state, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the winning start game corresponding to the hold display, the expected number of prize balls to be paid out in the corresponding jackpot game Whether the value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value is determined based on a prize ball expected value determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means. Then, when it is determined that the expected value of the number of prize balls is less than a predetermined value and when it is determined that the expected value of the number of prize balls is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, It is possible to execute display control that makes it easy to differ (predictive means for prize ball expected value in advance).

  According to such control, even if there is a situation in which the above-mentioned high probability gaming state is simply maintained without winning a jackpot, for example, the number of winning balls with an expected value that does not match the winning probability of the jackpot As long as at least one on-hold display with a high probability of generating a jackpot game that can only be obtained (the number of prize balls less than a predetermined value) is displayed, it is disadvantageous for the player over multiple symbol variations. The game will function as a disadvantaged game mode that actively recognizes the risk of playing a big hit game with a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, for example, there is not even one on-hold display with a high probability of generating a jackpot game in which only the expected number of winning balls (the number of winning balls less than a predetermined value) that does not match the winning probability of the jackpot is obtained. As long as there is only a pending display with a high probability of generating a jackpot game that gives the expected number of winning balls (the number of winning balls equal to or greater than the predetermined value) that matches the winning probability of the jackpot, The game will function as an advantageous game mode that actively recognizes that the player is in an advantageous game state that eliminates the risk of playing a game where a jackpot game that is considered to be an unfavorable winning ball expectation value over multiple symbol variations is performed. It becomes like this. That is, in this case, in the high-probability gaming state, a large number of holds is not necessarily an advantageous event for the player as it is, and thereby a game mode transition effect between a plurality of holding game modes having different degrees of advantage. You will be able to give the impression that it is being done. Therefore, if a high probability gaming state in which it is difficult to maintain a sense of tension due to the high probability of winning the jackpot, if such a reserved game is adopted, the tension in the gaming state is maintained. It becomes possible to be able to be maintained and this can be maintained suitably also about the game entertainment interest.

(Technical thought 5)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
First winning random number storage means stored so that the winning determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquiring means can be classified into either a loss value or a jackpot value;
A jackpot lottery for classifying and determining the winning determination random number as either the lost value or the jackpot value based on the first winning random number storage means is performed, and when the jackpot value is classified and determined as the jackpot value, A game control means capable of executing a winning start game in which a jackpot game that gives a privilege to the player as being elected is further performed;
State control means capable of generating a specific game state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the start port after the jackpot game is performed by the game control means;
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the game hold that waits and holds the winning start game by the game control means according to the winning determination random number among the acquired random numbers until the execution condition is satisfied Means,
In order to enable the player to recognize the holding status of the winning start game by the game holding means, a holding display corresponding to each of the winning start games set in the holding state is displayed on each predetermined holding display section. Display control means for performing display control on the hold display in a form that appears,
A part of the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be discriminated as a special hit value, respectively, and the jackpot value that can be discriminated is determined. A ratio to the lost value is a second winning random number storage means that is set to be at least twice as high as a ratio of the jackpot value to the lost value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means; ,
Prior to the winning start game being performed by the game control means, the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided to the winning start game while the winning start game is put on hold is the special winning value. A special hit determination means for performing a special determination process for determining that the special win is won when it is determined that the special hit value is determined;
With
The display control means includes
Even if the winning game is defeated when the winning start game held by the game holding means is digested when the winning start game execution condition is satisfied, it is expected that the jackpot is won. The symbol effect control means capable of executing the highly expected symbol effect to be obtained by a predetermined symbol effect unit, and a plurality of display forms in which different reliability levels are associated with the reliability level for winning the special hit. , Having a hold display form control means capable of executing a display control in which any of the display forms is selectively hold-displayed based on the result of the special determination process, and controlled to the specific gaming state When the hold display having a reliable display form among the plurality of display forms appears on the predetermined hold display unit by the hold display form control means By losing the gaze effect function that can be expected to win the jackpot as a highly anticipated symbol effect in the predetermined symbol effect part, a hold display having the highly reliable display form is newly provided. A gaming machine characterized in that a continuous holding effect on whether or not it appears is realized.

  That is, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, first, the jackpot value and the loss value that can be classified by the first winning random number storage means can be determined as special hit values, respectively. The ratio of the jackpot value that can be made to the lost value is a second winning set that is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot value that can be classified and determined by the first winning random number storage means to the lose value. Random number storage means was provided.

  Thereby, a high-accuracy random number group (the first random number group) which is higher than the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the above-mentioned loss value (the ratio determining the winning probability of the jackpot) is preferentially treated. 2 random number values stored in the winning random number storage means). In addition, as a price for the creation of the high-accuracy random number group in this way, the low-accuracy random number group sacrificed by lowering the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value. (Random values that are not registered as special winning values in the second winning random number storage means among the jackpot values and loss values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means) are naturally created. (A pair relationship with the high-precision random number group).

  That is, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, first, it is determined whether the winning determination random number of the random numbers belongs to the low-accuracy random number group or the high-accuracy random number group ( Special hit judgment means). As a result, when it is determined that the value belongs to the high-accuracy random number group (special hit value), for example, a pending display in which a high reliability is associated with the reliability that the special hit is won is displayed. If the display control is executed, the jackpot lottery (high) with a higher probability than the winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value is determined. An effect as if the winning start game in which a jackpot lottery in a certain random number group is held is put on hold (advantageous hold effect) is realized.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value belongs to the low-accuracy random number group (a value that does not correspond to the special hit value), for example, a hold with a low reliability associated with the reliability that the special hit is won If display control is performed in the form of display, the winning probability determined by the ratio of the jackpot value stored in the first winning random number storage means to the lost value is lower than the winning probability. It is also possible to realize an effect (a disadvantaged hold effect) as if the winning start game in which the big win lottery (the big win lottery in the low probability random number group) is held is put on hold.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, although a hold display associated with a high reliability does not appear and only the jackpot lottery in the low-accuracy random number group is likely to be performed (the probability that the jackpot probability is low such as 1/300) In the above-mentioned specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the game ball at the starting port, the player has lost the jackpot in view of the fact that he cannot expect much to win the jackpot. Regardless of the use of high expectation symbol variation production (design variation that requires a relatively long time) to avoid useless expectation, control (control to digest the winning start game that has been put on hold for a short time) is performed I am doing so.

  According to such control, although it is apparent that it is difficult to have an expectation for the symbol variation effect displayed on the predetermined effect display unit, “the appearance of a new hold display in the specific gaming state appears. In combination with “easy”, whether or not a hold display having a display form with high reliability appears in a predetermined hold display section (whether a random value belonging to a highly-probable random number group is newly acquired) The continuous hold display will appear (continuous hold effect). In other words, according to such a continuous hold display (continuous hold effect) realized by performing control that does not give expectation to the symbol effect in the predetermined effect display unit (short-term digestion of the winning start game). For example, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained without relying on the symbol effect in the effect display unit, which is unlikely to have high expectations due to the jackpot probability that is often set low. In addition, after it has been suggested through the above-mentioned holding effect that a random number value belonging to the high-accuracy random number group has been newly acquired, the winning probability that excludes the possibility of being a random value belonging to the low-accuracy random number group, A process is realized in which a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery in a high-precision random number group) is performed with a probability higher than the winning probability determined by one winning random number storage means. Then, only the jackpot lottery in which only one random number value in the highly-probable random number group is used is expressed as a highly anticipated symbol variation effect in the effect display unit, so that the specific immediately after the probability variation game state ends Even in the gaming state, a game that waits until a high-expected symbol variation effect appears as if the probability of winning the jackpot has been changed to be higher is realized. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain the gaming interest in the specific gaming state immediately after the probability variation gaming state ends.

  In the second winning random number storage means, part of the jackpot value and the lost value that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means can be respectively determined as special winning values. If so, all of the jackpot values that can be classified and discriminated by the first winning random number storage means may be discriminated as the special hit value.

(Technical thought 6)
A lottery process for the big hit is performed based on the winning of the game medium at the start port arranged in the game area, and it is usually according to the winning type of the big hit when the big win is won in the lottery process In a gaming machine capable of generating either a gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
As the starting port, a first starting port and a second starting port are provided,
Based on the winning of the game medium at the first start opening, the big win is set at a first lottery probability that is set to be higher in the special game state than in the normal game state. A lottery process is performed on the game, and when a big win is won in the lottery process, a first special game in which a game medium is given to the player is further performed. First game control means;
Based on the winning of the game medium at the second starting port, the same probability is obtained for the first lottery probability in the normal game state and in the special game state. Even if the lottery process for the jackpot is performed at the set second lottery probability, if the jackpot is won in the lottery process, the player is given the first special game. A second less advantageous to the player than the first start winning game in which a second special game in which only a small number of game media with an expected value smaller than an expected value of the number of game media to be given is given is further performed. A second game control means for performing the starting prize-winning game,
When a game medium wins the first start opening, the first start winning game is more advantageous for the player than the second start winning game based on the winning of the game medium to the first start opening. The game holding means for waiting until the execution condition is satisfied, and when the game medium is won at the second starting port, the advantage is based on the winning of the game medium at the second starting port. A disadvantageous game holding means for holding the second start winning game with low waiting until the execution condition is satisfied;
The normal game state corresponding to the winning type of the jackpot used as a trigger for the execution of the special game for a predetermined period after the special game of the first special game or the second special game is executed. State control means that can be controlled as any one of the special gaming states,
Specific game control means for performing control to avoid execution of the second start-up winning game with low advantage in the special game state,
The specific game control means includes
By increasing the frequency of changing the winning state of the game medium to the first starting port in the special gaming state so as to be easier than in the normal gaming state, the highly advantageous first starting winning is achieved. Advantageous game promotion control that increases the chances for a game to be played, and if the execution of the first advantageous winning game with high advantage is suspended in the specific gaming state, Regardless of the first start winning game with high advantage and the second start winning game with low advantage, the advantageous game holding means executes only the first start winning game with high advantage. By performing in the order in which they are held, the second start winning game with low advantage is all held by the advantageous game holding means for the first start winning game with high advantage. In this special game state, it is possible to avoid the execution of the second start-up winning game having a low advantage by performing two kinds of control of disadvantageous game suppression control that is executed as a postponement after digestion. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing.

  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 6 is one in which a lottery with a high advantage and a lottery with a low advantage are performed. In a special gaming state, a lottery with a high advantage is selected. By increasing the frequency reliably and prioritizing the lottery with higher advantage over the lottery with lower advantage, reducing the disadvantage of the player due to the fact that the lottery with low advantage is performed The purpose is that.

  In the gaming machine of the technical idea 6 described above, when a lottery process for a big win is performed based on the winning of a game medium at a start port arranged in the game area, and when the big win is won in the lottery process The game machine can generate either a normal gaming state or a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (a state in which the jackpot probability is set higher) according to the winning type of the jackpot is there.

  That is, in this type of gaming machine, even if controlled to an advantageous gaming state (such as a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated), the advantage may not be sufficiently enhanced depending on the gaming situation. Absent. In this case, even though the game state is controlled to be advantageous, the interest in the game state may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the technical idea 6, first, the start ports are provided as the first start port (second start port 2002) and the second start port (first start port 2001), and any of these two start ports has a game. Even if the medium wins, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the lottery probability set so as to have the same probability regardless of the gaming state. However, despite the fact that the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the same probability as described above, the jackpot is won in the lottery process performed based on the winning of the game medium to the first starting port. And a lottery process performed based on a winning of a game medium to the second starting port in a case where a big win is won in the lottery process performed based on a winning of the game medium to the second starting port In the case where the big hit is won in the game, only a small amount of game media with an expected value is given to the player.

  In this way, when a game medium is won at the second starting opening, an unfavorable game (second starting winning game having a low advantage for the player) in which the number of jackpot winning balls corresponding to the lottery probability is not paid out. In this way, when a game medium is won at the first starting port, an advantageous game in which the number of jackpot winning balls equal to or greater than the lottery probability is paid out (the first advantageous game for the player). Start winning game).

  Further, in this case, the start opening (the first start opening, the second start opening game) in which one of the first start winning game with high advantage and the second start winning game with low advantage becomes the winning destination of the game medium. The playability that is selectively performed according to the starting port) is also realized. Therefore, in the technical idea 6 described above, the frequency of changing the game medium to the first start port so that it is easy to win is lower when the game state is controlled to the normal game state than to the special game state. Thus, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the first start winning game having high advantage to be performed, and thereby the second start winning game having low advantage is performed at a higher frequency ( State control means).

  Here, for example, even if a big hit is finally won under a low probability of “1/300” in this embodiment, a special game that only allows several game balls to barely win the big prize opening. A game that is played only, that is, a game in which the jackpot probability “1/300” and the expected value of the number of jackpot winning balls set for the game are extremely unbalanced is the second start-up winning game in which the above advantage is low. It becomes. Therefore, in the above-described normal game state in which the second start winning game with low advantage is likely to be performed, the player expects the number of jackpot winning balls to be paid out in the special game every time the game medium is won at the starting port. A lottery process for a big hit is often performed with a big hit probability that does not match the low value. In other words, in the normal gaming state, the player not only enjoys the benefit of realizing the first advantageous start winning game with the above advantage but also plays the first advantageous start winning game with the above advantage. Only the disadvantages (losses) due to the second start winning game having the low advantage as the existence to be realized are incurred.

  However, by taking only such a disadvantage at the stage before the transition control to the special gaming state (the normal gaming state) in this way, the advantage after the transition control to the special gaming state. It is possible to realize a gaming state that is high, i.e., without the disadvantages of gaming. In this regard, according to the technical idea 6 described above, in the special game state, the execution of the second start-up winning game with low advantage is always postponed, and the first start-up winning game with high advantage is about to be delayed. All of the above-mentioned holdings are digested first (disadvantage game suppression control), and until this, the holding state of the above-mentioned highly advantageous first start winning game is interrupted, and the above highly advantageous first starting win is obtained. Only games are played sequentially. In addition, the game medium is awarded to the first start port that triggers the execution of the game so as not to interrupt the on-hold state of the game (the first start winning game having high advantage) that is digested first. The frequency of changing to an easy state is increased (advantageous game promotion control), thereby enabling continuous execution of only the first advantageous winning game with high advantage (specific game control means).

  In this way, in the special gaming state, the player can conversely to the normal gaming state that suffered only the disadvantage by performing the control that can avoid the second start winning game with low advantage. Thus, it is possible to receive only the profits obtained by realizing the first start winning game with high advantage. Further, as long as only the first start winning game with high advantage is continuously executed in this way, the holding of the game on the side to be digested after that (the second start winning game with low advantage) is not digested. Since the hold state is maintained (the execution of the second start winning game having a low advantage is avoided), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the execution of the second start winning game having a low advantage. Will be able to.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 400 Handle device 410 Operation handle part 600 Game panel 600e Opening part 601 Front component 602 Outer rail 603 Inner rail 605 Out area 621 Outer box 621c Aperture)
630 Panel holder 630b Through-hole 635 Panel back plate 650 Hit ball launcher 800 Prize ball unit (payout unit)
1400 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Attacker unit (receiving unit)
2001 First start port (receiving port)
2002 Second starting port (receiving port)
2003 Grand Prize Entrance (Reception Entrance)
2004 General prize winning entrance
2005 Movable piece 2006 Opening / closing member 2100 Side prize opening member (accepting unit)
2101 General winning entrance (entrance)
2200 Gate member 2300 Center object 2302 Warp entrance (advance entrance)
2303 Warp exit 2310 Stage 2350 Center frame movable ornament 3000 Back unit 3300 Lower movable ornament 3400 Upper left movable ornament 3500 Upper right movable ornament 3610 Lower center ornament (panel support member)
3610a per unit ZG1 to ZG3 decorative symbol CR1 first character CR2 second character CR3 third character CR4 fourth character CR5 fifth character MH front background UH rear background

Claims (1)

Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a game ball entering the start opening;
Jackpot determination means for performing determination processing for jackpot based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Special game execution means for performing a special game in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the determination processing by the jackpot determination means being a jackpot;
When a jackpot is won in the determination process by the jackpot determining means, the special game is executed by the special game executing means based on the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, and the player has a low advantage. State control means capable of generating either a low-probability gaming state or a high-probability gaming state that is more advantageous for the player by making the jackpot easier to win than the low-probability gaming state;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a game holding means for waiting and holding the determination process by the jackpot determination means according to the acquired random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
A state in which a hold display corresponding to each determination process in the hold state appears on a predetermined display unit so that the player can recognize the hold status of the determination process by the game hold means. On hold display control means for performing display control related to the hold display in,
While the determination process by the jackpot determination means is in a pending state, the expectation level for winning the jackpot when the determination process is performed is based on a random number provided to the determination process. An anticipatory advance determination means for determining in advance which is
With
The hold display control means includes
In performing the hold display, it is determined whether or not the expectation is determined to be high in the advance determination by the expectation advance determination means based on the winning determination random number among the random numbers provided for the determination process displayed on hold. In addition, when it is determined that the degree of expectation is high, an expectation prior suggestion unit capable of executing display control in a form in which a specific display mode different from a normal display mode appears for the hold display, and the hold display In doing so, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the determination process displayed on hold, it is determined whether the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state occurs after a special game corresponding thereto. When it is determined based on the winning type determination random number among the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, and it is determined that the low probability gaming state occurs And a specific state prior suggestion means capable of executing display control that makes it easy to change the display mode of the hold display of each other when it is determined that the highly probable gaming state occurs, and control to the low-probable gaming state When the determination process is performed, display control by the expectation prior suggestion means can be executed to make it easy to maintain a sense of expectation when the determination process is put on hold, while When controlled to the certain gaming state, the display control by the specific state prior suggestion means can be executed, so that in any of the determination processes in the holding state, the high certainty gaming state is A game machine characterized in that the determination process in the on-hold state is sequentially digested while making the player aware of whether the game is likely to be terminated and controlled to the low probability gaming state.